office tables Price List July 2012

Transcription

1 Office Tables Price List July 2012 Knoll, Inc. P.O. Box Water Street East Greenville, PA knoll.com PLTAB0712 Knoll, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States on paper that contains 50% recycled content and 15% post consumer waste. office tables Price List July 2012

2 Table of Contents Introduction Knoll and Sustainable Design 4 Introduction to 5 Antenna Workspaces Tables 6 Legs for C-Leg and T-Leg Tables 10 Antenna Tops For C-Leg and T-Leg Tables 11 AutoStrada AutoStrada Basics 12 AutoStrada Materials and Details 13 AutoStrada Finishes 14 AutoStrada Paint and Laminate Finishes Matrix 15 Tables 16 Table desks 18 Worksurface support 20 Rectilinear for C-Leg and T-Leg bases 23 Crinion Open Table Introduction 24 Specifications 25 Crinion Open Table Finishes 26 Worksurfaces with center hinged power access 27 Worksurfaces with edge grommet 28 Worksurfaces with cord drop 29 End counters 30 Extended end counters 31 File tops 33 Complete base assemblies fixed height 24 D dual 34 Complete base assemblies fixed height 24 D single sided 35 Complete base assemblies fixed height 30 D dual 36 Complete base assemblies fixed height 30 D single sided 37 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 30 D dual 38 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 30 D single sided 39 Complete base assemblies fixed height 36 D dual 40 Complete base assemblies fixed height 36 D single sided 41 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 36 D dual 42 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 36 D single sided 43 Top channels 44 Beams for single sided or dual tables 45 Beams for dual tables 46 Beams for single sided tables 47 End legs, intermediate leg sets for dual tables 48 End legs, intermediate leg sets for single sided tables 50 End panels for dual tables and single sided tables, painted 51 End panels for dual tables and single sided tables, laminate and veneer 52 Beam trusses 53 Worksurface support 54 Modular Raceway 56 Hardwire Raceway 62 Cable tray and cable clips 63 Beam mounted cable trays and cable baskets 64 Center screens 65 Shelves, adapters and buttresses for slatwall screens 67 Side screens 68 Return screens 70 Dual end screens 72 Single sided end screen 74 Frameless glass Add up 76 Morrison Network privacy screens 77 Copyright 2012 Knoll, Inc. All rights reserved. All prices effective 7/15/ PLTAB0712

3 Reff Profiles General Specifications 78 Reff Profiles finish options 79 Reff Profiles Master Features 81 Optional edge details 82 Conference 1 1 /4 83 Optional edge 1 1 /4 85 Waterfall Edge 1 1 /4 88 Tables, 1 1 /2 90 Tables, Top support components 104 Worksurface 1 1/4 114 Interaction Interaction Base Options 115 Interaction Table Planning 117 Ordering Interaction Tables 121 Interaction Core Finishes 122 Interaction Legacy Finishes 123 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height 124 C-leg tables, fixed and adjustable height, linking tops 126 C-leg tables, Counterforce corners and split-tops 127 T-leg and column base tables, file top 129 Morrison System Top Tables Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height 131 C-leg tables, fixed height 132 C-leg tables, manually adjustable 133 C-leg tables, crank adjustable 134 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable 135 T-leg tables 136 C-leg tables, split top 137 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable 138 C-leg tables, electric adjustable 139 Equity System Top Tables Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height 140 C-leg tables, fixed height 141 C-leg tables, manually adjustable 142 C-leg tables, crank adjustable 143 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable 144 T-leg tables 145 C-leg tables, split-top 146 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable 147 C-leg tables, electric adjustable 148 Reff System Top Tables Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height 149 C-leg tables, fixed height 150 C-leg tables, manually adjustable 151 C-leg tables, crank adjustable 152 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable 153 T-leg tables 154 C-leg tables, split top 155 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable 156 C-leg tables, electric adjustable 157 Dividends Horizon System Top Tables Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height 158 C-leg tables, fixed height 159 C-leg tables, manually adjustable 160 C-leg tables, crank adjustable 161 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable 162 T-leg tables 163 C-leg tables, split-top 164 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable 165 C-leg tables, electric adjustable 166 2

4 Cascade Edge Top Tables Interaction Bases Only Accessories Currents Upstart Equity Dividends Horizon Morrison Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height C-leg tables, fixed height C-leg tables, manually adjustable C-leg tables, crank adjustable C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable C-leg tables, top crank adjustable C-leg tables, electric adjustable Interaction bases Accessories Introduction to Currents Currents Color Program Currents Legacy Finishes Worksurface supports Desks Above-desk storage and lighting for desks Worktables Introduction to Upstart Original Upstart Planning Examples Knoll Color Program Upstart Legacy Finishes Upstart Tables Plannable Upstart Tables Accessories Upstart Privacy Screens Plannable Upstart Privacy Screens Equity finishes Tables Y Leg Tables X Base Tables Table Supports Rectangular and Corner C-Leg and T-Leg Worksurfaces Conference Tables Knoll Color Program Morrison Options worksurfaces, 1 1/4 Fixed Height and Height Adjustable C-Leg and T-Leg Bases Alpha-Numeric Index Selling Policy KnollKey Lock Program General Ordering Information

5 Knoll and Sustainable Design Each year Knoll sets key initiatives in our journey to sustainability. We are members of a global consortium on energy, have adopted a scientific, metrics-based approach to sustainable product design, and maintain a leadership position in establishing universal, verifiable, sustainability standards for our industry. Knoll promotes independent third-party certification because it provides the most impartial and trustworthy foundation for industry-wide environmental compliance. Certification by established and respected third parties ensures that all manufacturers are held to the same high standards and that customers can trust a company s declaration about the environmental benefits of its products. Knoll third-party partners include: the International Standards Organization (ISO); Forest Stewardship Council (FSC ); Rainforest Alliance; GREENGUARD Environmental Institute; and The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer s Association (BIFMA) level certification from Scientific Certification Systems (SCS). In addition, Knoll is aligned with the U.S. Green Building Council and can help companies, healthcare organizations and educational institutions achieve Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED ) workplace certification. Global Climate Change Knoll is a sponsor of the Clinton Global Initiative, which brings together a community of global leaders to devise and implement solutions to some of the world s most pressing challenges, including environmental change. Knoll has a comprehensive Energy Management Program to increase energy efficiency in products and processes. Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) Tool Life Cycle Assessment is a science-based measurement of a product s environmental impacts throughout its life cycle, from raw materials sourcing through manufacture, shipping, use and re-use or end-of-life. LCA enables cradle-to-cradle implementation of sustainable practices. Knoll has partnered with The Green Standard.org to develop an affordable, universal ISO-compliant computer-based LCA tool that can be used by the entire contract furniture industry and is partnering on the development of an Environmental Product Declaration System (EPDs) for Knoll products. EPDs are verified documents containing LCA results and additional environmental performance information about a product. Setting Industry Standards Knoll partners with MTS (The Institue for Market Transformation to Sustainability) to develop the SMaRT Consensus Sustainable Products Standards, a set of consensus-based sustainable product standards based on the LEED model, for all building products, fabric, apparel, flooring and carpet. MTS, the developer of SMaRT, is an accredited American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard developer. Knoll also partners with BIFMA (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association) to promote level sustainability standards for the contract furniture industry. Knoll has established FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) certified wood as the standard for general office open plan office systems, casegoods and tables. Knoll has launched Full Circle, a resource recovery program developed with ANEW, to help customers extend the life cycle of surplus furniture, fixtures and equipment (FF&E) in an economically, socially and environmentally responsible manner. Our goal is to encourage all manufacturers in the contract furniture industry and related industries to adopt standards that will lead to sustainable products and practices. For more information about Knoll and sustainable design, visit knoll.com/environment. 4

6 Introduction to The following Price List pages are a compilation of Knoll office tables. The product information contained in this Price List reflects the same product information contained in each System s individual Price List. For example, the Equity tables contained in this Price List can also be found in the Equity Price List. For electronic specification, discounting, lead times, and additional product information, please refer to each product s individual Price List. For KnollStudio tables, please refer to the KnollStudio Price List. 5

7 Tables Planning Guidelines and Specifications 6

8 Tables Antenna Tops Track, Round, Square and Rectangle description w d h pattern no. Laminate (L) V1 (V) V2 (V) V3 (V) Chrome Base Upcharge Tables with Track Shaped Antenna Tops /2 YKTT7236D( ) $1,406. $2,398. $2,641. $3,201. n/a /2 YKTT8442D( ) 1,514. 2,748. 3,040. 3,712. n/a /2 YKTT9648D( ) 1,677. 3,124. 3,464. 4,248. n/a Antenna Workspaces Tables with Round Shaped Antenna Tops /2 YKTR42L( ) 1,136. 2,185. 2,405. 2, /2 YKTR42M( ) 1,136. 2,185. 2,405. 2, /2 YKTR42D( ) 1,136. 2,185. 2,405. 2, /2 YKTR48D( ) 1,244. 2,304. 2,539. 3, Tables with Square Shaped Antenna Tops /2 YKTS3030L( ) ,230. 1,303. 1, /2 YKTS3030M( ) ,230. 1,303. 1, /2 YKTS3030D( ) ,230. 1,303. 1, /2 YKTS3636D( ) 1,067. 1,323. 1,406. 1, /2 YKTS4242D( ) 1,170. 1,528. 1,645. 1, /2 YKTS4848D( ) 1,272. 1,738. 1,873. 2, Tables with Rectangle Shaped Antenna Tops /2 YKTS4824D( ) 1,035. 1,283. 1,361. 1, /2 YKTS5427D( ) 1,140. 1,399. 1,486. 1, /2 YKTS6030D( ) 1,263. 1,479. 1,567. 1, /2 YKTS7236D( ) 1,366. 1,628. 1,755. 2, /2 YKTS8442D( ) 1,630. 1,823. 1,948. 2, Ordering Information Included With Options Tables 1. Pattern Number 2. Top Finish 3. Edge Finish (for laminate tops only) 4. Rail Paint Finish 5. Cradle Paint Finish (for chrome legs only) 6. Leg Paint Finish Tables Example: YKTS3030DL, 118T, 118T, 118T, 118T, 118T YK Table Kit TS Antenna Square Top 30 Depth 30 Width D Desk Height L Laminate 118T Bright White Top 118T Bright White Edge 118T Bright White Paint 118T Bright White Paint 118T Bright White Paint Tables Antenna Top (2) Rails (2) End Legs (4) Cradles (4) Leveling Glides Attachment Hardware Table Top Finish Options: (L) = Laminate (V) = Veneer Leg Finish Options: End Legs are available in Knoll core paints, Dark Red (130) and Slate blue (131) paint finishes, as well as polished chrome (PD) finish. Add the chrome base upcharge to the table list price when the table base is specified with a chrome finish. Chrome base is not available on track shaped tables. 7

9 Tables Glass Tops Track, Round, Square and Rectangle description w d h pattern no. Tables with Track Shaped Glass Tops Clear Glass (TEMP) Powder Glass (GL13) Starfire Clear Glass (GL85) Grey Glass (GL35) Back Painted Black Glass (GL11) Back Painted White Glass (GL45) Chrome Base Upchg /2 YKTT7236DG $3,696. $4,641. $5,061. $5,990. $6,993. $6,993. n/a /2 YKTT8442DG 4,095. 5,376. 5,954. 7,004. 8,589. 8,589. n/a /2 YKTT9648DG 4,547. 6,216. 6,983. 8, , ,406. n/a Tables with Round Shaped Glass Tops /2 YKTR42LG 2,594. 3,234. 3,523. 4,200. 5,093. 5, /2 YKTR42MG 2,594. 3,234. 3,523. 4,200. 5,093. 5, /2 YKTR42DG 2,594. 3,234. 3,523. 4,200. 5,093. 5, /2 YKTR48DG 2,867. 3,701. 4,074. 4,820. 5,796. 5, Tables with Square Shaped Glass Tops Tables with Rectangle Shaped Glass Tops /2 YKTS3030LG 1,964. 2,289. 2,436. 3,360. 3,108. 3, /2 YKTS3030MG 1,964. 2,289. 2,436. 3,360. 3,108. 3, /2 YKTS3030DG 1,964. 2,289. 2,436. 3,360. 3,108. 3, /2 YKTS3636DG 2,142. 2,615. 2,825. 3,780. 3,791. 3, /2 YKTS4242DG 2,405. 3,045. 3,334. 4,358. 4,652. 4, /2 YKTS4848DG 2,620. 3,455. 3,833. 4,925. 5,555. 5, /2 YKTS4824DG 1,832. 2,252. 2,441. 2,704. 3,297. 3, /2 YKTS5427DG 2,116. 2,646. 2,888. 3,224. 3,969. 3, /2 YKTS6030DG 2,678. 3,329. 3,623. 4,064. 4,967. 4, /2 YKTS7236DG 3,008. 3,948. 4,379. 4,956. 6,300. 6, /2 YKTS8442DG 3,722. 5,187. 5,849. 6,164. 8,841. 8, Ordering Information Included With Options Tables 1. Pattern Number 2. Top Finish 3. Rail Paint Finish 4. Cradle Paint Finish (for chrome legs only) 5. Leg Paint Finish Tables Example: YKTS4824DG, TEMP, 118T, 118T, 118T YK Table Kit TS Antenna Square Top 48 Depth 24 Width D Desk Height G Glass TEMP Clear Glass 118T Bright White Rails 118T Bright White Cradles 118T Bright White Legs Tables Glass Top (2) Rails (2) End Legs (4) Cradles (4) Leveling Glides Attachment Hardware Table Glass Top Finish Options: Add finish option as suffix to pattern number: (TEMP) = Clear Glass (GL13) = Powder Glass (GL85) = Starfire Clear Glass (GL35) = Grey Tinted Glass (GL11) = Back Painted Black Glass (GL45) = Back Painted White Glass Leg Finish Options: End Legs are available in Knoll core paints, Dark Red (130) and Slate blue (131) paint finishes, as well as polished chrome (PD) finish. Add the chrome base upcharge to the table list price when the table base is specified with a chrome finish. Chrome base is not available on track shaped tables. 8

10 Tables Overlay Tops Square and Rectangle description width depth height pattern number Color Core Laminate (C) V1 (V) V2 (V) V3 (V) Chrome Base Upcharge Tables with Square Shaped Overlay Tops /2 YKPTS3030L( ) $2,324. $1,799. $1,957. $2,324. $ /2 YKPTS3030M( ) 2,324. 1,799. 1,957. 2, /2 YKPTS3030D( ) 2,324. 1,799. 1,957. 2, /2 YKPTS3636D( ) 2,473. 1,909. 2,080. 2, /2 YKPTS4242D( ) 2,636. 2,035. 2,218. 2, /2 YKPTS4848D( ) 2,774. 2,135. 2,329. 2, Antenna Workspaces Tables with Rectangle Shaped Overlay Tops /2 YKPTS4824D( ) 2,388. 1,848. 2,012. 2, /2 YKPTS5427D( ) 2,569. 1,985. 2,162. 2, /2 YKPTS6030D( ) 2,690. 2,070. 2,259. 2, /2 YKPTS7236D( ) 2,891. 2,214. 2,517. 2, /2 YKPTS8442D( ) 3,189. 2,460. 2,681. 3, Ordering Information Included With Options Tables 1. Pattern Number 2. Top Finish 3. Edge Finish (for laminate tops only) 4. Rail Paint Finish 5. Cradle Paint Finish (for chrome legs only) 6. Leg Paint Finish Tables Example: YKPTS3030DL, 311, V440, 118T, 118T, 118T YK Table Kit PTS Overlay Square Top 30 Depth 30 Width D Desk Height C Color Core Laminate 311 Solid Gallery White Top V440 Natural Hemlock Edge 118T Bright White Paint 118T Bright White Paint Tables Antenna Top (2) Rails (2) End Legs (4) Cradles (4) Leveling Glides Attachment Hardware Table Top Finish Options: (C) = Color Core Laminate (V) = Veneer Leg Finish Options: Table Desk End Legs are available in Knoll core paints, Dark Red (130) and Slate blue (131) paint finishes, as well as polished chrome (PD) finish. Add the chrome base upcharge to the table list price when the table base is specified with a chrome finish. 9

11 Legs for C-Leg and T-Leg Tables Fixed Height and Height Adjustable description type w* w d pattern no. 24 Deep C-Leg Bases Fixed Shown 30 Deep C-Leg Bases Fixed Shown 30 Deep T-Leg Bases Pin-Set Shown Fixed (F) Pin-Set (P) Handcrank (H) Electric (E) Advanced Electric (A) For use with 36 W, 24 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC3423( ) $955. $1,273. $1,909. $3,316. $3,491. For use with 42 W, 24 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC4023( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 48 W, 24 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC4623( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 54 W, 24 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC5223( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 60 W, 24 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC5823( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 66 W, 24 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC6423( ) ,295. 1,932. 3,338. 3,514. For use with 72 W, 24 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC7023( ) ,295. 1,932. 3,338. 3,514. For use with 36 W, 30 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC3429( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 42 W, 30 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC4029( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 48 W, 30 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC4629( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 54 W, 30 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC5229( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 60 W, 30 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC5829( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 66 W, 30 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC6429( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. For use with 72 W, 30 D Antenna C-Leg Top YUBC7029( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. For use with 48 W, 30 or 36 D Antenna T-Leg Top For use with 54 W, 30 or 36 D Antenna T-Leg Top For use with 60 W, 30 or 36 D Antenna T-Leg Top For use with 66 W, 30 or 36 D Antenna T-Leg Top For use with 72 W, 30 or 36 D Antenna T-Leg Top YUBT4629( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3, YUBT5229( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3, YUBT5829( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3, YUBT6429( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3, YUBT7029( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. w* = nominal width Ordering Information Included With Options C-Leg and T-Leg Bases 1. Pattern Number 2. Base Type 3. Shroud Option 4. Base Finish 5. Shroud/Feet Paint Finish (optional) C-Leg and T-Leg Bases Example: YUBC5829HS, 9005, 613 YUB Universal Base C C-Leg 58 Width 29 Depth H Handcrank S Shroud 9005 Black Base Finish 613 Shroud/Feet Paint Finish C-Leg and T-Leg Bases Mounting hardware Shrouds (optional) C-leg and T-Leg Bases Base Type Options: (F) = Fixed (27 High) (P) = Pin-Set (22-35 High) (H) = Handcrank (22-35 High) (E) = Electric ( /2 High) (A) = Advanced Electric ( /2 High) Shroud Option: Add an S suffix to the pattern number to specify a painted shroud for the lower leg with matching foot and add $100 to the list price. Add an N suffix to specify a leg without a shroud. 10

12 Antenna Tops For C-Leg and T-Leg Tables 24,30 and 36 Deep Rectangular description type w* w d h pattern no. Laminate (L) Antenna C-Leg Tops, 24 Deep For use with 24 D C-Leg base /4 YT3324( ) $217. $438. $504. $ /4 YT3924( ) /4 YT4524( ) /4 YT5124( ) /4 YT5724( ) /4 YT6324( ) /4 YT6924( ) V1 (V) V2 (V) V3 (V) Antenna Workspaces Antenna C-Leg and T-Leg Tops, 30 Deep For use with 30 D C-Leg base /4 YT3330( ) /4 YT3930( ) For use with 30 D C-Leg or T-Leg base /4 YT4530( ) /4 YT5130( ) /4 YT5730( ) /4 YT6330( ) /4 YT6930( ) Antenna T-Leg Tops, 36 Deep For use with 30 D T-Leg base /4 YT4536( ) /4 YT5136( ) /4 YT5736( ) , /4 YT6336( ) , /4 YT6936( ) ,109. w* = nominal width Ordering Information Included With Options Antenna Tops 1. Pattern Number 2. Top Finish 3. Edge Finish (for laminate tops only) Antenna Tops Example: YT5730L, 118, 118 YT Top 57 Width 30 Depth L Laminate 118 Bright White Laminate 118 Bright White Edge Antenna Tops Antenna Tops Top Finish Options: Add an (L) for laminate or (V) for veneer suffix to pattern number. 11

13 AutoStrada Basics Introduction With a commitment to innovation and modern aesthetics, Knoll sets the standard for the environment in which people work. AutoStrada is one of the most comprehensive office concepts to be developed by Knoll. Evolving workplace needs are met with innovative design, from private offices to collaborative spaces for team interaction. AutoStrada addresses any office combination with a consistent aesthetic of high quality materials and carefully detailed design. Whether an office requires a high-performance open plan system, refined architectural case goods, progressive private office furniture, or a collaborative big table concept, AutoStrada provides a solution. AutoStrada is a planning approach that combines furniture and interior architecture for both open plan and private offices spaces. AutoStrada is a premium, one-source design. AutoStrada is the definition of the most advanced technology management capabilities. AutoStrada is modern. It is absolute design with a strong, basic design premise. The Planning Models Four AutoStrada planning models offer one set of continuous, intelligent, solutions-oriented capabilities. Four ways AutoStrada redefines space: Spine-based planning Storage-anchored planning Collaborative table-based planning Architectural office planning Any one environment could include solutions provided by any mix or all of the four planning models. Diverse planning models meet cross-cultural workplace environments everywhere. AS1 AutoStrada spine based planning AutoStrada spine based planning provides wall-like architectural order to office interiors and offers high performance technological support. The spine supports continuous off-module attachment of worksurfaces, storage components, KnollExtra accessories, and perpendicular linkable screens or panels to define workstations. The spine also manages and distributes power and communications throughout clusters of workstations, enabling convenient outlets at desk height and unobstructed access to cabling. Spines can be built to any one foot increment of length and can be freestanding with outriggers to support cantilevered worksurfaces and overhead storage. Spines may also be integrated with attached panels or screens for support and enclosure. T-ends enable the spine to extend to absorb the dimensional gain of attached panels. Spine covers include veneer, laminate, dry-erase marker, tackable fabric, integral shelves, slat wall and integral cable tray surfaces. Spines are available in three horizons--39 H, 48 H and 64 H-- and may be fitted with frameless glass add ups for additional privacy above any of four crown profiles. Linkable screens are available in tackable upholstered or glazed panels and windows, with a complete range of connectors that also support worksurfaces and storage. AS2 AutoStrada storage anchored planning AutoStrada storage anchored planning redefines the open office architecture with aesthetic and functional alternatives to conventional panel-based systems. Storage anchored planning begins with the anchor cabinet to which either AutoStrada panels or wood or laminate surrounds are attached to create individual or shared work areas. Storage anchored planning combines the performance of systems furniture with elegant details more like custom millwork. AutoStrada panels feature a laminate or veneer tiled grid to the floor, with aluminum reveals between tiles on the exterior, and fabric or fabric and slat wall surfaces on the inside of the workstation. Interior base raceway distributes power and communications throughout a cluster with outlets only on the inside of the panels. AutoStrada panel heights enable seated access (42 H), seated privacy (49 H) or standing privacy (64 H). Frameless glass add ups can be added to panels for additional privacy. Connectors support worksurfaces, overhead storage or shelves and KnollExtra paper management and technology support tools. AutoStrada surrounds, in veneer or laminate surface, are ideal for raised floor environments and a visual alternative to panels. Median surrounds or median storage form the backbone to which bridges and anchor cabinets are attached. Medians include a back panel, one or two end gables, a counter surface and a worksurface or shelves. Bridges include a back panel and worksurface. AutoStrada surrounds typically describe workstation boundaries at a 49 horizon. AS3 AutoStrada wall based planning AutoStrada wall based planning integrates freestanding and wall supported storage, desks and tables to build distinctive workspaces in private offices and walled collaborative areas. AutoStrada Applied Walls add systems performance to built walls, enabling various surface materials and off module support for shelves, overheads and worksurfaces. Applied wall is either 69 Hor84 H, in any 6 increment of width. Horizontal channels contain interchangeable inserts like veneer, marker surface, fabric, glass, slat wall or recessed covers, and accept brackets for a variety of accessories at any point. Wall frames transfer most of the supported load directly to the floor. AutoStrada overheads and tackboards can also be directly attached to most built walls. Freestanding AutoStrada cabinets for private offices are available in 70 and 84 horizons. AS4 AutoStrada collaborative planning AutoStrada collaborative planning is based on the Crinion Open Table, which creates open shared workspaces for groups from two to ten or more at a continuous worksurface bench. Designed to support teams of people Crinion Open Table is ideal for trading rooms, libraries and conference rooms. Crinion Open Table offers a unique alternative to traditional workstations, with continuous cantilevered worksurfaces, unobstructed kneespace, convenient, capable power and communications distribution, and optional desktop privacy screens. An extremely strong structure supports worksurfaces up to 36 d each side and virtually unlimited in length. Crinion Open Table may be complemented with AutoStrada metal or wood storage, or Calibre files and cabinets as parallel file banks or as returns. 12

14 AutoStrada Materials and Details Materials AutoStrada offers a range of exceptional materials and finishes, including premium grade hardwood veneers, Techwood, laminate, clear anodized aluminum, and architectural glass. Veneers are all hand selected to best showcase the beauty of natural grain. Every effort is made to ensure that Knoll veneers are the best that can be sourced in quality of color, consistency and size. Natural variations of wood are not considered to be defects. The natural process of color change in real wood products is part of the beauty and unique character of the material. Knoll expects wood to patina over time. Techwood is a genuine wood veneer which has been enhanced by technology to provide color and grain consistency. High recycled content aluminum is used in the manufacture of aluminum components. High-pressure laminate surface materials have been selected for their durability and low maintenance. FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) certified materials are available by request. Construction details All AutoStrada worksurfaces are 1 1 /4 thick and are a 3 ply solid construction. Worksurfaces are available in rectilinear and wedge shapes. The distinctive 3 /8 tapered edge can be specified on just the user side or also on the approach side. Worksurfaces can be specified full depth with or without grommets, or with a 3 /8 cord drop along the back with a centered edge grommet. Worksurfaces appear to float 1 above lower storage components. Pedestals and legs can support a worksurface height of 28 1 /4 H (typically in open plan) or 29 5 /8 (in private offices). The higher worksurface height requires wood pedestals equipped with cabinet feet. Pedestals and overhead storage are available in either metal or wood case. Wood pedestals have full extension file drawer slides with bottom-loadable steel floor and 3/4 extension slides all wood construction box drawers. Wood or laminate case cabinets with hinged doors and adjustable shelves require doors to be removed to adjust shelving; alternatively a special request 170 hinge package is available to retrofit cabinets in the field. Metal pedestals and Reuter overhead storage cabinets with flat front are durable steel construction with painted, laminate or veneer drawer fronts. Metal pedestals feature full width protruding aluminum pull. Metal pedestals have all full extension personal, data and file drawer slides. Wood cases incorporate 3 ply construction and components are finished on all sides. Core material is 45lb density particleboard. Wood drawers feature dovetail joinery details. File drawers have steel floor and are bottom loadable. Wood drawers feature full width anodized aluminum recessed or protruding pull. File drawers include file bars to support letter or legal suspended filing in either direction. Freestanding private office cabinets are supported by cylindrical extruded aluminum feet which match an optional worksurface standoff detail. Spine, linkable screens, panels, legs and metal storage offer 1 or greater levelling capacity. Wood storage has 1 /2 levelling. Cable management AutoStrada incorporates discreet and concealed wire management as well as four or six circuit power distribution in all four planning models, supporting low to very high technology requirements. Storage anchored surrounds, designed for raised floor environments, are the only planning type that does not have power distribution capability. Leg design AutoStrada support legs are a refined shape in clear anodized aluminum finish. Legs feature either lockable casters or a unique glide sleeve that allows leveling without exposed glide threads. A pair of straight legs or one 9 wide leg can support one end of a worksurface when the other end is spine-supported, panel-supported or joined to a perpendicular worksurface with AT2TB brackets. If distance between support spans over 48, additional support is required. Two pairs of straight legs may also be specified to create a freestanding table in combination with an AutoStrada worksurface not to exceed 72 x30 with a corresponding stiffener. Representative Dimensions All dimensions in this price list are nominal and for representative purposes only. For specific build dimensions please consult specification planning tools or contact your Customer Service representative. Line drawings in this price list are strictly for quick product identification. AutoStrada Locks All pedestals and cabinets with drawers are supplied with a ganglock mechanism in place. In addition, cabinets 30 wide and over with drawers have an interlock anti-tip feature to prevent the opening of a second drawer when one is already open. Drawer fronts and door fronts where applicable are routed to receive the lock itself. Keying instructions for key alike must accompany all orders and are field installed. Products are shipped from the factory with random locks or lock plugs for key-alike orders. 13

15 AutoStrada Finishes Finishes L - Laminate Matching edge band unless noted otherwise 117 Soft Grey 118 Bright White 114 Folkstone Grey 111 Jet Black 119 Pumice 121 Micro Grey with 114 Folkstone grey edge band 122 Brushed Sand with 119 Pumice edge band 123 Brushed Grey with 128 Fog edge band 128 Fog 129 Micro Sand with 119 Pumice edge band 124 Medium Cherry 125 Natural Maple 126 Natural Cherry 127 Walnut V1 - Techwood Veneer Y316 Maple Y319 Cherry Y323 Medium Walnut Y326 Dark Mahogany Y327 Light Oak Y329 Medium Oak Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak Y344 Espresso Y851 Black Oak Y811 Natural Y821 Blond Maple Y831 Light Cherry V2 Natural Veneer/ Premium Techwood Veneer V312 Bronze Cherry V316 Maple V411 Light Walnut V415 Peacock Green Walnut V417 Old English Walnut V418 Smoked Walnut V433 Light Fawn Cherry V436 Medium Brown Cherry (above V2 s are flat cut) V421 Chalk Oak V423 Light Oak V425 Amber Oak V427 Brown Oak (above V2 Oaks are rift cut) V439 Straight Anigre V440 Natural Hemlock (above V2 s are quarter cut) Y841 Ebony Y861 Grigio Y871 Iced Sycamore (above Premium techwoods are straight grain) V3 Exotic veneer V512 Figured Anigre V514 Makore V515 Figured Sycamore V517 Natural Sapele V518 Natural Chestnut (all V3s are quarter cut) Paint P1 111 Jet Black 112 Brown 113 Dark Grey 114 Folkstone Grey 115 Medium Grey 116 Sandstone 117 Soft Grey P2 611 Beige Mist Metallic 612 Medium Metallic Grey P3 118 Bright White 613 Silver Anodized AA Anodized Aluminum Plated PT Brushed Pewter Glass G1 TEMP Clear Tempered Architectural Glass G2 GL6 Block Matrix GL13 Powder Mixed Finishes: (where applicable for work surfaces only) To order mixed finishes, enter four digit finish code as follows: Use 2 digit prefix to indicate surface finish (laminate) 11 Jet Black 14 Folkstone Grey 17 Soft Grey 18 Bright White 19 Pumice 21 Micro Grey 22 Brushed Sand 23 Brushed Grey 28 Fog 29 Micro Sand Use 2 digit suffix to indicate edge finish (wood) 12 for V for V316, Y316 Y9 for Y319 Y3 for Y for Y for Y for Y for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V427 Example: For a Micro Grey laminate surface with Bronzed Cherry edge, enter finish code 2112 For a Jet Black laminate surface with Light Maple edge, enter finish code

16 AutoStrada Paint and Laminate Finishes Matrix All standard Paint Finishes AA or all paints except Silver Laminate Horizontal Surfaces Laminate Vertical Surfaces AS1 Spine Based standard crown covers spine base trim covers worksurfaces structural base covers structural base covers slat wall covers tables access covers outlet covers integral shelves fronts for metal pedestals spine connectors flat crown covers fronts for Reuter overheads metal pedestals and flat crown covers box shelves fronts Reuter cases and fronts straight legs wide legs pulls Anodized Aluminum Only AS2 Storage Anchored slat wall, panel panel top trim worksurfaces all laminate pedestals top trim wider than 96 panel raceway covers panel reveals anchor cabinets storage reveals medians pulls bridges tiles, panels all laminate overheads AS3 Applied Wall & private office wall covers horizontal channels up to 96 worksurfaces wall covers horizontal channels wider than 96 components coat hook slat wall covers tables freestanding storage picture hook recess covers applied wall shelves wall hung overheads bookends end trim cable tray marker tray display shelf shelf platforms AS4 Crinion Open Table end legs hinged access worksurfaces, tapered beams edge and post formed intermediate legs top channel up to 96 top channel longer than 96 cantilevers screen frames AutoStrada Finish code Finish name Paint grade All standard Paint Finishes AA or all paints except Silver Laminate Horizontal Surfaces Laminate Vertical Surfaces 611 Beige Mist Metallic P2 118 Bright White P3 112 Brown P1 123 Brushed Grey 122 Brushed Sand 113 Dark Grey P1 128 Fog 114 Folkstone Grey P1 111 Jet Black P1 115 Medium Grey P1 612 Medium Metallic Grey P2 121 Micro Grey 129 Micro Sand 119 Pumice 116 Sandstone P1 613 Silver P3 117 Soft Grey P1 Anodized Aluminum Only 812 Easy Grey* 813 Trim Grey* AA Anodized Aluminum LW Markerboard White ** Notes: All laminates have matching edge bands except: 123 Brushed Grey has 128 Fog edge 122 Brushed Sand has 119 Pumice edge 121 Micro Grey has 114 Folkstone grey edge 129 Micro Sand has 119 Pumice edge * Easy Grey and Trim grey integral colors only available for Compact crown covers Linkable screen trim Linkable screen top caps Spine end connector top caps ** Markerboard white is available only on AS1 spine access covers, AS3 Applied Wall covers and AS4 screens. 15

17 Tables with straight legs description h w d dia. pattern no. L M V1 V2 V3 Square table, tapered 4 sides 28 1 / ATA1T44242( )( )( )( )( ) $1,569. $1,740. $1,827. $1,863. $2, / ATA1T44848( )( )( )( )( ) 1,698. 1,782. 1,871. 1,923. 2,292. Rectangular table, tapered 4 sides 28 1 / ATA1T44830( )( )( )( )( ) 1,602. 1,725. 1,811. 1,836. 2, / ATA1T46030( )( )( )( )( ) 1,688. 1,820. 1,911. 1,950. 2, / ATA1T47230( )( )( )( )( ) 1,773. 1,856. 1,949. 1,995. 2, / ATA1T47236( )( )( )( )( ) 1,815. 1,887. 1,981. 2,042. 2,463. Round table, tapered edge 28 1 /4 36 ATA1R36( )( )( )( )( ) 1,627. 1,866. 1,772. 1,829. 2, /4 42 ATA1R42( )( )( )( )( ) 1,704. 1,901. 1,813. 1,884. 2, /4 48 ATA1R48( )( )( )( )( ) 1,842. 1,945. 1,864. 1,949. 2,353. Example: ATA1T44242V27C V316AA A AutoStrada TA Table 1 Generation 1 T4 Tapered edge 4 sides wide deep V Surface type, veneer leg height C Caster V316 Finish top, Maple AA Finish, leg Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Width 2. Depth 3. Surface type L = Laminate M = Mixed, Laminate surface/v1, V2 or V3 edge V = V1, V2 or V3 4. Leg height (to underside of surface) 27=27 h 28=28 3 /8 h (add $30 for this option) 30=30 1 /8 h (add $66 for this option) 5. Leg type C = with Caster G = with Glide 6. Finish, Surface Laminate, Mixed, V1, V2 or V3 finish Finish, Edge Must be same as surface finish unless M surface type specified, then must be V1, V2 or V3 finish 8. Finish, Leg Anodized aluminum finish or painted finish option excluding silver. See AutoStrada for finish options applicable. Product on this page will accept wood grain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Grommets are not optional for tables. Stiffener included with rectangular tables 60 w and over. AutoStrada tables include four straight legs with glides or casters. Tables can be specified to surface height of: 28 3 /8 : specify 27 leg /8 : specify 28 leg /2 : specify 30 leg.

18 Tables with L-legs description h w d dia. Square table, tapered 4 sides with L-legs leg height pattern no. L M V1 V2 V / ATAT4LL424227(L/M/V)( )( )( ) $2,276. $2,529. $2,655. $2,709. $3, / ATAT4LL484827(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,290. 2,544. 2,671. 2,726. 3, / /8 ATAT4LL424228(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,280. 2,534. 2,661. 2,714. 3, / /8 ATAT4LL484828(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,319. 2,575. 2,704. 2,759. 3,173. Round table, tapered edge with L-legs Rectangular table desk, tapered 4 sides with L-legs 28 3 / ATARLL3627(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,215. 2,462. 2,585. 2,637. 3, / ATARLL4227(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,221. 2,469. 2,592. 2,644. 3, / ATARLL4827(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,234. 2,481. 2,605. 2,660. 3, / /8 ATARLL3628(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,253. 2,503. 2,628. 2,681. 3, / /8 ATARLL4228(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,259. 2,510. 2,636. 2,689. 3, / /8 ATARLL4828(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,272. 2,522. 2,648. 2,704. 3, / ATDT4LL483027(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,079. 2,309. 2,424. 2,475. 2, / ATDT4LL603027(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,116. 2,350. 2,468. 2,519. 2, / ATDT4LL723027(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,134. 2,371. 2,490. 2,540. 2, / ATDT4LL723627(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,153. 2,392. 2,512. 2,564. 2, / /8 ATDT4LL483028(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,162. 2,403. 2,523. 2,575. 2, / /8 ATDT4LL603028(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,218. 2,466. 2,589. 2,641. 3, / /8 ATDT4LL723028(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,265. 2,517. 2,643. 2,697. 3, / /8 ATDT4LL723628(L/M/V)( )( )( ) 2,303. 2,559. 2,687. 2,742. 3,152. AutoStrada Example: ATAT4LL V316AA A AutoStrada TA Table T4 Top tapered 4 sides LL L-Leg wide deep 27 Leg height V Surface type, veneer V316 Finish top, Maple AA Finish, leg Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Width 2. Depth 3. Leg height (to underside of surface) 27=27 h 28=28 3 /8 h 4. Surface type L = Laminate M = Mixed, Laminate surface/v1, V2 or V3 edge V = V1, V2 or V3 5. Finish, Surface Laminate, Mixed, V1, V2 or V3 finish Finish, Edge (if applicable) Must be same as surface finish unless M surface type specified, then must be V1, V2 or V3 finish 7. Finish, Leg Anodized aluminum finish or painted finish option excluding silver. See AutoStrada for finish options applicable. Product on this page will accept wood grain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Grommets are not optional for tables. Worksurface stiffener included with rectangular table desks 60 w and over. AutoStrada table desks include four L-legs with glides. Tables can be specified to overall surface height of: 28 3 /8 : specify 27 leg /8 : specify 28 leg.

19 Table desks with L-legs description h w d Rectangular table desk with L-legs and full front modesty leg height pattern no. L M V1 V2 V / ATDT1LFM483027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) $2,559. $2,843. $2,985. $3,047. $3, / ATDT1LFM603027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,597. 2,886. 3,030. 3,091. 3, / ATDT1LFM723027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,628. 2,920. 3,066. 3,128. 3, / ATDT1LFM723627(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,645. 2,940. 3,087. 3,150. 3, / /8 ATDT1LFM483028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,699. 2,997. 3,147. 3,211. 3, / /8 ATDT1LFM603028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,703. 3,002. 3,152. 3,216. 3, / /8 ATDT1LFM723028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,712. 3,013. 3,164. 3,228. 3, / /8 ATDT1LFM723628(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,740. 3,044. 3,196. 3,261. 3,751. Rectangular table desk with L-legs and partial front modesty Rectangular table desk with L-legs and full front&side modesties 28 3 / ATDT1LPM483027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,454. 2,727. 2,863. 2,922. 3, / ATDT1LPM603027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,460. 2,732. 2,869. 2,927. 3, / ATDT1LPM723027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,469. 2,743. 2,880. 2,939. 3, / ATDT1LPM723627(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,497. 2,774. 2,913. 2,972. 3, / /8 ATDT1LPM483028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,557. 2,841. 2,983. 3,044. 3, / /8 ATDT1LPM603028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,562. 2,846. 2,988. 3,050. 3, / /8 ATDT1LPM723028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,572. 2,856. 2,999. 3,062. 3, / /8 ATDT1LPM723628(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 2,599. 2,888. 3,032. 3,094. 3, / ATDT1LFS483027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,009. 3,343. 3,698. 3,774. 4, / ATDT1LFS603027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,212. 3,568. 3,746. 3,823. 4, / ATDT1LFS723027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,249. 3,610. 3,791. 3,867. 4, / ATDT1LFS723627(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,276. 3,641. 3,823. 3,902. 4, / /8 ATDT1LFS483028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,263. 3,625. 3,806. 3,884. 4, / /8 ATDT1LFS603028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,305. 3,672. 3,856. 3,934. 4, / /8 ATDT1LFS723028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,343. 3,715. 3,901. 3,978. 4, / /8 ATDT1LFS723628(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,370. 3,745. 3,932. 4,012. 4,615. Example: ATDT1LPS483027VG V316AA111 A AutoStrada TD Table desk T1 Top tapered 1 side (user only) L L-Leg FM Full front modesty wide deep 27 Leg height V Surface type, veneer G Grommet V316 Finish top, Maple AA Finish, leg 111 Grommet finish Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Full or partial modesty (and end panels when applicable) 2. Width 3. Depth 4. Leg height (to underside of surface) 27=27 h 28=28 3 /8 h 5. Surface type L = Laminate M = Mixed, Laminate surface/v1, V2 or V3 edge V = V1, V2 or V3 6. Grommet G=Grommet N=No Grommet 7. Finish, Surface Laminate, Mixed, V1, V2 or V3 finish Finish, Edge Must be same as surface finish unless M surface type specified, then must be V1, V2 or V3 finish 9. Finish, Leg Anodized aluminum finish or painted finish option excluding silver. 10. Finish, Grommet See AutoStrada for finish options applicable. Laminate finish options for modesty panels on this page are as follows: 114 = Folkstone grey 117 = Soft grey 118 = Bright white 119 = Pumice Product on this page will accept wood grain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Worksurface stiffener included with rectangular tables 60 w and over. AutoStrada tables include four L-legs with glides and full or partial height modesty (and optional end panels). Tables can be specified to overall surface height of: 28 3 /8 : specify 27 leg /8 : specify 28 leg. Partial height option for 27 leg is nominally 13 and 14 h nominally with 28 3 /8 h legs; and may be mounted flush to underside of worksurface or with 1 gap below worksurface.

20 Table desks with L-legs description h w d Rectangular table desk with L-legs and partial front and side modesties leg height pattern no. L M V1 V2 V / ATDT1LPS483027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) $3,009. $3,343. $3,510. $3,581. $4, / ATDT1LPS603027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,050. 3,390. 3,560. 3,632. 4, / ATDT1LPS723027(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,089. 3,431. 3,603. 3,677. 4, / ATDT1LPS723627(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,116. 3,462. 3,635. 3,710. 4, / /8 ATDT1LPS483028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,102. 3,446. 3,618. 3,693. 4, / /8 ATDT1LPS603028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,145. 3,493. 3,668. 3,743. 4, / /8 ATDT1LPS723028(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,182. 3,535. 3,712. 3,787. 4, / /8 ATDT1LPS723628(L/M/V)( )( )( )( )( ) 3,209. 3,566. 3,744. 3,821. 4,395. AutoStrada Example: ATDT1LPS483027VG V316AA111 A AutoStrada TD Table desk T1 Top tapered 1 side (user only) L L-Leg FM Full front modesty wide deep 27 Leg height V Surface type, veneer G Grommet V316 Finish top, Maple AA Finish, leg 111 Grommet finish Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Full or partial modesty (and end panels when applicable) 2. Width 3. Depth 4. Leg height (to underside of surface) 27=27 h 28=28 3 /8 h 5. Surface type L = Laminate M = Mixed, Laminate surface/v1, V2 or V3 edge V = V1, V2 or V3 6. Grommet G=Grommet N=No Grommet 7. Finish, Surface Laminate, Mixed, V1, V2 or V3 finish Finish, Edge Must be same as surface finish unless M surface type specified, then must be V1, V2 or V3 finish 9. Finish, Leg Anodized aluminum finish or painted finish option excluding silver. 10. Finish, Grommet See AutoStrada for finish options applicable. Laminate finish options for modesty panels on this page are as follows: 114 = Folkstone grey 117 = Soft grey 118 = Bright white 119 = Pumice Product on this page will accept wood grain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Worksurface stiffener included with rectangular tables 60 w and over. AutoStrada tables include four L-legs with glides and full or partial height modesty (and optional end panels). Tables can be specified to overall surface height of: 28 3 /8 : specify 27 leg /8 : specify 28 leg. Partial height option for 27 leg is nominally 13 and 14 h nominally with 28 3 /8 h legs; and may be mounted flush to underside of worksurface or with 1 gap below worksurface.

21 Worksurface support Straight legs, wide legs and L-legs description type height pattern number list Straight leg (pair) Fixed height 27 AB1AS27 ( ) $ /8 AB1AS28 ( ) /8 AB1AS30 ( ) 393. Straight leg with casters (pair) Fixed height 27 AB1ASC27 ( ) /8 AB1ASC28 ( ) /8 AB1ASC30 ( ) 393. Wide leg Fixed height 27 AB1AW27 ( ) /8 AB1AW28 ( ) 356. L-legs (pair) Fixed height 26 1 /2 APTLL26( ) APTLL27( ) /8 APTLL28( ) 672. Example: AB1AS28 AA AB1A AutoStrada leg S Straight 28 Height AA Finish Specification Information AutoStrada straight legs, wide legs and L-legs are available in anodized aluminum or painted finish option listed on AutoStrada excluding silver. To order specify pattern number including height 1. Specify finish 20 A pair of straight legs or a pair of L-legs or one wide leg can support one end of a worksurface when the other end is spine-supported, panel-supported or joined to a perpendicular worksurface with AT2TB brackets. If distance between support spans over 48, additional support is required. Two pairs of straight legs or L-legs may also be specified to create a freestanding table in combination with an AutoStrada worksurface not to exceed 72 x36 with a corresponding worksurface stiffener. AutoStrada straight legs are available in three heights with or without casters: 27 from floor to underside of worksurface ( 28 3 /8 desk height ) 28 3 /8 from floor to underside of worksurface (29 3 /4 desk height ) 30 1 /8 from floor to underside of worksurface (31 1 /2 desk height ) AutoStrada wide legs are only available on glides, 27 or 28 3 /8 to underside of worksurface. AutoStrada L-legs are available in three heights, glide only (no caster option) 26 1 /2 h, 27 h and 28 3 /8 h.

22 Worksurface support Fixed Height and Height Adjustable C-Leg and T-Leg Bases description type w* w d pattern no. 24 Deep C-Leg Bases Fixed Shown 30 Deep C-Leg Bases Fixed Shown 30 Deep T-Leg Bases Fixed (F) Pin-Set (P) Handcrank (H) Electric (E) Advanced Electric (A) For use with 36 W, 24 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC3423( )( )( )( ) $955. $1,273. $1,909. $3,316. $3,491. For use with 42 W, 24 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC4023( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 48 W, 24 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC4623( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 54 W, 24 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC5223( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 60 W, 24 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC5823( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 66 W, 24 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC6423( )( )( )( ) ,295. 1,932. 3,338. 3,514. For use with 72 W, 24 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC7023( )( )( )( ) ,295. 1,932. 3,338. 3,514. For use with 36 W, 30 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC3429( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 42 W, 30 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC4029( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 48 W, 30 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC4629( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 54 W, 30 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC5229( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 60 W, 30 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC5829( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 66 W, 30 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC6429( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. For use with 72 W, 30 D AutoStrada C-Leg Top ABAC7029( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. For use with 48 W, 36 D AutoStrada T-Leg Top ABAT4629( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 54 W, 36 D AutoStrada T-Leg Top ABAT5229( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 60 W, 36 D AutoStrada T-Leg Top ABAT5829( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 66 W, 36 D AutoStrada T-Leg Top ABAT6429( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. For use with 72 W, 36 D AutoStrada T-Leg Top ABAT7029( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. AutoStrada Pin-Set Shown Specification Information Example: ABAC5829HS, 9005, 613 ABA Universal Base C C-Leg 58 Width 29 Depth H Handcrank S Shroud 9005 Black Base Finish 613 Shroud/Feet Paint Finish w * = nominal width To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Base Type: (F) = Fixed (27 High) (P) = Pin-Set (22-35 High) (H) = Handcrank (22-35 High) (E) = Electric ( /2 High) (A) = Advanced Electric ( /2 High) Base height ranges shown do not include worksurface thickness. 2. Shroud Options: (N) = Leg without a metal shroud (S) = Painted metal shroud to surround lower leg with matching foot. Add $100 to the list price. 3. Base Finish: default black paint (9005) 4. Shroud/Feet Paint Finish, when applicable Bases are designed for use with corresponding worksurfaces to create freestanding tables. Worksurfaces must be specified separately. Base comes with worksurface mounting hardware and leveling glides with 1 /4 of height adjustability. 23 D C-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 24 D. 29 D C-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 30 D. 29 D T-Leg bases support rectangular tops 36 D centered over feet. 36 W C-Leg bases (except for Pin-set) support tops up to 60 w centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). 36 W Pin-Set C-Leg bases cannot support tops wider than the base. 42 W C-Leg bases support tops up to 66 W centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). 48,54, 60 and 66 W C-Leg and T-Leg bases support tops up to 30 wider than the base centered over feet (max 15 overhang on each side). 72 W C-Leg and T-Leg bases support tops up to 96 W centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). Bases have a default black paint finish (9005). Painted lower leg shroud and feet can be specified in Knoll Core paint finishes. Fixed and Pin-Set bases support up to 440lbs. Handcrank bases support up to 260lbs. Electric bases support up to 300lbs. Pin-Set base adjusts on 1 increments. Crank handle is located on the right side of the base. Five turns of the handle adjust worksurface height 1. 21

23 Worksurface support Modesty panels description h w pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Half height suspended modesty /2 AHHSM36 ( ) $338. $408. $443. $ /2 AHHSM42 ( ) /2 AHHSM48 ( ) /2 AHHSM54 ( ) /2 AHHSM60 ( ) /2 AHHSM66 ( ) /2 AHHSM72 ( ) /2 AHHSM78 ( ) /2 AHHSM84 ( ) /2 AHHSM90 ( ) /2 AHHSM96 ( ) Specification Information Example: AHHSM30V316 A AutoStrada HH Half height S Suspended M Modesty 30 for 30 w work surface V316 Finish, Maple To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish Laminate, V1, V2 or V3 finish See AutoStrada for finish options applicable. Product on this page will accept wood grain laminate where laminate is currently an option. To be used for free-standing private office applications. Half height suspended modesty intended for optional use with work surfaces when creating configurations including a peninsula top supported at one end by a pair of legs (legs on page 20) or freestanding table desk by set of legs and would install just behind the legs by angle bracket that ships with modesty. Attachment hardware included. If installing below worksurface with grommets, be sure to specify recessed grommet location. 22

24 Rectilinear for C-Leg and T-Leg bases 24,30 and 36 Deep description type d* d w* w pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 C-Leg and T-Leg Rectangular Tops For use with 24 D C-Leg base AW1T1R3423( )N( ) $396. $573. $658. $ AW1T1R4023( )N( ) AW1T1R4623( )N( ) AW1T1R5223( )N( ) , AW1T1R5823( )N( ) , AW1T1R6423( )N( ) , AW1T1R7023( )N( ) ,171. For use with 30 D C-Leg base AW1T1R3429( )N( ) AW1T1R4029( )N( ) AW1T1R4629( )N( ) , AW1T1R5229( )N( ) , AW1T1R5829( )N( ) , AW1T1R6429( )N( ) , AW1T1R7029( )N( ) ,252. AutoStrada For use with 30 D T-Leg base AW1T2R4635( )N( ) ,059. 1, AW1T2R5235( )N( ) ,020. 1,140. 1, AW1T2R5835( )N( ) ,014. 1,146. 1, AW1T2R6435( )N( ) ,024. 1,158. 1, AW1T2R7035( )N( ) ,048. 1,188. 1,504. Specification Information Example: AW1T1R5829LN, 118 AW Worksurface 1 Generation 1 T1 Tapered 1 side, user R Rectilinear 58 Width 29 Depth L Laminate N No Grommets 118 Bright White Laminate w * and d * = nominal dimensions To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Width 2. Depth 3. Surface Type: L = Laminate V = V1, V2 or V3 4.N=NoGrommet 5. Finish, Surface Laminate, V1, V2 or V3 See page 7 for finish options applicable. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Worksurfaces on this page are designed for use with fixed and height adjustable C-Leg and T-Leg bases to create freestanding tables. 23,29 and 35 rectangular worksurfaces are for use with corresponding depth fixed and height adjustable C-Leg bases and T-Leg bases. 23 and 29 worksurfaces are user edge tapered. 35 worksurfaces are user and approach edges tapered. Worksurfaces are pre-drilled with pilot holes for use with wood screws. Actual worksurfaces are undersized by 1 on each side edge and by 1 on the back edge. 23

25 Introduction This Order Guide provides basic planning, specifications and pricing information for Crinion Open Tables. Refer to KnollExtra price list for compatible accessories such as flat screen monitor supports, task lights, paper management accessories, keyboard and storage drawers. Refer to Calibre, Reff or Currents price lists for shared and individual storage options. Additional information can be found at Crinion Open Table is the straightforward alternative for open, collaborative work environments. Crinion Open Table typically consists of deep worksurfaces end-to-end and back-to-back, cantilever supported by parallel beams between end legs or end panels. The beams form a technology corridor for flat screen monitor supports, outlets and power/data distribution. Also available is a single-sided configuration, with a single main beam and a smaller back beam, and a single beam configuration for tables with shallower (24 deep) worksurface. The center of dual tables or back of single-sided tables features a top channel which supports privacy screens above the table and modular power distribution below the worksurface. Crinion Open Table is appropriate for libraries and education environments, laboratories, finance and trading desks, teaming areas and design offices. Crinion Open Table is unique in offering individual heightadjustability and extraordinarily deep worksurfaces. Overall dual table depth is 48,60 or 72. The table structure is strong enough to span 16 feet between end legs or intermediate supports to build tables of any length. The continuous worksurfaces and clear kneespace enable varying numbers of workers to sit on each side. Storage is typically separated from the table in parallel, shared file-and-storage islands, perpendicular files as returns or mobile pedestals. Crinion is distinguished by a minimalist, modern design, and details like square or tapered edge worksurfaces, plastic laminate, Techwood or natural veneers, and aluminum fittings. Crinion Open Table simplifies the planning and specifications of an open office, and it can make a dramatic visual and functional statement of collaboration. The quality and classic design of Crinion work well in virtually any interior. 24

26 Specifications Specifying Crinion Open Table Crinion Open Tables are comprised of worksurfaces, table base assemblies, power components and screens. Worksurfaces Individual worksurfaces are available in four standard widths (48,60,72,96 ) and three depths (nominal 24,30,36 ), which may be combined to form single-sided or dual-sided groups of two to ten or more positions. Worksurface edge options Worksurfaces are 1 1 /4 thick, with three front edge options: Tapered edge, laminate, veneer or mixed. Square edge, veneer Postformed edge, laminate only Power and accessory options Worksurfaces may be specified with hinged power access door and continuous 1 /2 cord drop, or edge grommet and continuous cord drop, or just cord drop. Hinged power access door is 24 W and 5 D, centered on worksurface width. Door hinges toward user for continuity between access opening and cord drop. Any worksurface (except end counters) accepts clamp on KnollExtra accessories such as flat screen monitor arm or task light. Other worksurface types End counters have front edge detail on side edges as well and are designed to extend dual tables 24 or 30 beyond the end leg. End counters also include 3 wide center grommet. Extended end counters are 36 D surfaces with center grommet or hinged power access door. Base of the table must be extended 12 under the back of each extended end counter (although top channels should be specified only as wide as the worksurfaces on each side of the table). All end counters must be supported by end counter cantilevers and endlegs for end counters. Worksurface heights Fixed height cantilevers support worksurfaces at 28 1 /2 H, with 27 clear below the top (except directly below cantilevers). Adjustable height cantilevers enable worksurfaces to be independently set at 27,27 3 /4,28 1 /2,29 1 /4,or30 H. Open Table base assemblies Complete base assemblies simplify specifications for most common configurations of dual or single-sided open tables. Base assemblies include top channels and end caps, beams, end legs and intermediate legs (where required), trusses and top channel supports, cantilever brackets (specify fixed or adjustable height) and midspan supports. Specify worksurfaces, screens, power components, cable trays and accessories separately. Complete base assemblies are available for the following typical tables, combinations of 60 or 72 worksurfaces. Single-sided or dual, 24 D, 30 D, or 36 D, with continuous beam span between end legs 10 W two/four positions 60 W 12 W two/four positions 72 W 15 W three/six positions 60 W Single sided or dual 24 D, 30 D, or 36 D, with intermediate leg 18 W three/six positions 72 W 20 W four/eight positions 60 W 24 W four/eight positions 72 W 25 W five/ten positions 60 W Open Table base components Base assemblies may also be specified by individual components to create configurations other than those listed above, or to create tables with end counters or frameless glass add ups. In addition to worksurfaces Open tables require top channel, starter beams for spans up to 15, extension beams for additional spans of 4 to 15, intermediate legs every 16 or less, two end legs or end panels, trusses at every worksurface junction and at each end leg or end panel. Adjustable tables require two cantilevers per worksurface (or three for 96 W). Fixed height tables may be supported by a fixed height cantilever at each end, shared cantilevers at each worksurface joint, and a midspan support bracket at the center of each worksurface greater than 48 wide. For 96 W worksurfaces the midspan support should be a 24 D cantilever. Power components, cable trays and screens are optional. Power distribution Optional modular raceway distributes 2+2 four circuit or 3+3 six circuit configuration from a single point of supply. Bundles of cables can be managed from the floor in a cable infeed shroud located at any intermediate leg. Raceway provides power outlets and data/communications outlet openings on one or both sides, accessed through hinged access doors in worksurfaces or from under table. Specify 30 raceway for two duplex outlets each side or 42 raceway for four duplex outlets each side. Specify compact power module for outlets under an extended end counter. Duplex outlets, power infeed and jumpers between raceways must be specified separately. Privacy screens There are four screen options for Crinion Open Table. The standard screens are 14 H (42 horizon) or 21 H (49 horizon) in acrylic, slat wall or combination surfaces, tackable fabric, marker or veneer. Center screens include mounting hardware to attach to the standard top channel. Center screens are available full width, 48,60 or 72, or shorter by 1 to leave space at either end of the table for a dual end screen. Side screens attach to the front and back of a worksurface at any point other than at a hinged access door. Mounting brackets are specified separately to correspond to each worksurface edge detail. Dual end screens span across the end of a table (or above an end counter) from worksurface front edges. Frameless glass add ups are available in 12 height only, 48,60, and 72 W. Add ups can only mount to a top channel for frameless glass add ups, which may be at the center of a dual table or back of a single-sided table. Original Crinion privacy screens are 12 Hor19 H (41 or 48 horizons) and mount to a standard top channel only. Morrison Network fabric screens (15 Hor22 H) can also be mounted to the standard top channel with Crinion Open Table mast kit. Accessories and storage All Crinion worksurfaces accept clamp base KnollExtra flat screen monitor arms and task lights at any point except behind the hinged power access door. Worksurfaces also accept suspended accessories like adjustable keyboard supports, BackPack center file or keyboard drawers, or CPU holders. Beam location under most tables prevents pedestals deeper than 20 underneath. However 36 D tops can be planned on 30 D table bases to create additional kneespace depth and room for 24 D pedestals. Crinion Open Table file tops are available for 27 H Calibre files positioned perpendicular to the table to act as returns. Tapered front and back edges assure consistent detail with tapered worksurface edges. File tops are also available for pairs of files and back to back files. Crinion Open Table 25

27 Crinion Open Table Finishes Finishes L - Laminate Matching edge band unless noted otherwise 117 Soft Grey 118 Bright White 114 Folkstone Grey 111 Jet Black 119 Pumice 121 Micro Grey with 114 Folkstone grey edge band 122 Brushed Sand with 119 Pumice edge band 123 Brushed Grey with 128 Fog edge band 128 Fog 129 Micro Sand with 119 Pumice edge band Additional wood grain laminates for application on postformed laminate tops only. (not available on end counters or tapered edge tops): 125 Natural Maple 126 Natural Cherry 124 Medium Cherry 127 Walnut V1 - Techwood Veneer Y316 Maple Y319 Cherry Y323 Medium Walnut Y326 Dark Mahogany Y327 Light Oak Y329 Medium Oak Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak Y344 Espresso Y811 Natural Y821 Blond Maple Y831 Light Cherry Y851 Black Oak V2 Natural Veneer/Premium Techwood Veneer V312 Bronze Cherry V316 Maple V411 Light Walnut V415 Peacock Green Walnut V417 Old English Walnut V418 Smoked Walnut V433 Light Fawn Cherry V436 Medium Brown Cherry (above V2 s are flat cut) V421 Chalk Oak V423 Light Oak V425 Amber Oak V427 Brown Oak (above V2 Oaks are rift cut) V439 Straight Anigre V440 Natural Hemock (above V2 s are quarter cut) Y841 Ebony Y861 Grigio Y871 Iced Sycamore (above Premium Techwoods are straight grain) V3 Natural Exotic veneer V512 Figured Anigre V514 Makore V515 Figured Sycamore V517 Sapele V518 Natural Chestnut (all remaining V3s are quarter cut) Paint P1 111 Jet Black 112 Brown 113 Dark Grey 114 Folkstone Grey 115 Medium Grey 116 Sandstone 117 Soft Grey P2 611 Beige Mist Metallic 612 Medium Metallic Grey P3 118 Bright White 613 Silver Anodized AA Anodized Aluminum Glass TEMP Clear Tempered GL13 Powder Acrylic O Opal T Translucent Architectural GL13 Powder Fabric Options Grade 10 Annex (W1360) Broadcloth II (W1619) Element (W1077) Foundation (W351) Growth Spurt (W692) Symbolic Detail (W693) Tailor Made II (W1610) Versatility (W432) Fabric Options Grade 20 Banyan (W443) Bauhaus Block (W296A) Circle Line (W1146) Clarity (W281) Criss Cross (W305) Logic (W1318) Reflect (W884) Resolution (W280) Weave Three (W298) Grade 30 Basket Draft (W249) Flow (W565) Harmony (W232) Interknit (W1090) Match Point (W1145) Micro (W465) Progression (W403) Relay (W1020) Grade 40 Amplify (W1215) Bandwidth (W1219) Clarkson (W1218) Ornament (W1078) Spellbound (W1464) Grade 45 Dristi (K872) Macro (W544) Mezzo (W543) Grade 50 Presto (K1000) Grade 55 Ransom (K1298) Transition (W816) Customers Own Material Prices for panels that are to be manufactured with a customer supplied fabric will follow Grade 10 panel pricing. COM fabrics are subject to a testing charge prior to acceptance for use on panels. Panels bearing COM fabrics are subject to extended leadtimes. It is the responsibility of the customer s purchasing agent to ensure COM fabric is supplied for testing and manufacturing. Delays in receiving COM fabric for manufacturing will result in rescheduled delivery dates. Mixed Finish work surfaces: To order mixed finishes, enter four digit finish code as follows: Use 2 digit prefix to indicate surface finish (laminate) 11 Jet Black 14 Folkstone Grey 17 Soft Grey 18 Bright White 19 Pumice 21 Micro Grey 22 Brushed Sand 23 Brushed Grey 28 Fog 29 Micro Sand Use 2 digit suffix to indicate edge finish (wood) 16 for V316, Y316 Y9 for Y319 Y3 for Y for Y for Y for Y for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V427 Example: For a Micro Grey laminate surface with Bronzed Cherry edge, enter finish code 2112 For a Jet Black laminate surface with Light Maple edge, enter finish code

28 Worksurfaces with center hinged power access description nominal depth w d h pattern number L M V1 V2 V3 Worksurface, tapered edge /4 XTTK4824A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) $794. $931. $931. $1,022. $1, /4 XTTK6024A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,020. 1,020. 1,126. 1, /4 XTTK7224A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,078. 1,078. 1,196. 1, /4 XTTK9624A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,218. 1,218. 1,360. 1, /4 XTTK4830A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,010. 1,010. 1,117. 1, /4 XTTK6030A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,094. 1,094. 1,213. 1, /4 XTTK7230A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,133. 1,133. 1,257. 1, /4 XTTK9630A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) 1,020. 1,284. 1,284. 1,431. 1, /4 XTTK4836A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,100. 1,100. 1,225. 1, /4 XTTK6036A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,180. 1,180. 1,309. 1, /4 XTTK7236A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,193. 1,193. 1,323. 1, /4 XTTK9636A (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) 1,086. 1,351. 1,351. 1,507. 1,869. Worksurface, veneer square edge /4 XTTS4824A (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS6024A (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS7224A (1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTS9624A (1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTS4830A (1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTS6030A (1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTS7230A (1/2/3) ( )( ) ,019. 1, /4 XTTS9630A (1/2/3) ( )( ) ,083. 1, /4 XTTS4836A (1/2/3) ( )( ) ,050. 1, /4 XTTS6036A (1/2/3) ( )( ) ,090. 1, /4 XTTS7236A (1/2/3) ( )( ) 1,031. 1,151. 1, /4 XTTS9636A (1/2/3) ( )( ) 1,110. 1,265. 1,578. Crinion Open Table Worksurface, postformed plastic /4 XTTP4824A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP6024A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP7224A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP9624A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP4830A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP6030A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP7230A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP9630A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP4836A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP6036A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP7236A (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP9636A (L) ( )( ) 920. Specifications Example: XTTP6030AL XT Crinion Open Table T Worksurface P Postformed plastic 60 Width 30 Depth A With center hinged power access L Finish Type 118 Work Surface finish 118 Access door finish Worksurfaces are 1 1 /4 thick with square edge or tapered edge option tapering to 1 /2 thick front edge. 1. Specify finish group: L - Laminate M - Laminate/veneer edge 1 - Veneer group Veneer group Veneer group 3 2. Specify worksurface finish. 3. Speicfy hinged access cover finish. AA anodized aluminum and all P1,P2 and P3 paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Crinion 30 D worksurfaces correspond in width to table bases, which are specified separately. 48 W worksurfaces plan on 12 wide or 20 wide bases. 60 W worksurfaces plan on 5, 10, 15 and 20 wide bases. 72 W worksurfaces plan on 6, 12 and 18 wide bases. Worksurfaces with hinged power access enable access to suspended modular raceway. Power access door is 24 wide, 5 deep, centered at back edge of worksurface. Continous 1 /2 wire drop accommodates clamp-on flat screen monitor arm or most power cords plugs. Actual worksurface depth is 22.35, or

29 Worksurfaces with edge grommet description nominal depth w d h pattern number L M V1 V2 V3 Worksurface, tapered edge /4 XTTK4824U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) $534. $671. $671. $762. $ /4 XTTK6024U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTK7224U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTK9624U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,100. 1, /4 XTTK4830U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTK6030U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTK7230U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTK9630U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,024. 1,024. 1,171. 1, /4 XTTK4836U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTK6036U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,049. 1, /4 XTTK7236U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,063. 1, /4 XTTK9636U (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) ,091. 1,091. 1,247. 1,609. Worksurface, veneer square edge /4 XTTS4824U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS6024U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS7224U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS9624U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS4830U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS6030U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS7230U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS9630U (1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTS4836U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS6036U (1/2/3) ( )( ) /4 XTTS7236U (1/2/3) ( )( ) , /4 XTTS9636U (1/2/3) ( )( ) ,005. 1,318. Worksurface, postformed plastic /4 XTTP4824B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP6024B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP7224B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP9624B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP4830B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP6030B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP7230B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP9630B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP4836B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP6036B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP7236B (L) ( )( ) /4 XTTP9636B (L) ( )( ) 660. Specifications Example: XTTP6030BL XT Crinion Open Table T Worksurface P Postformed plastic 60 Width 30 Depth B With edge grommet L Finish type 118 Surface finish 812 Grommet finish Worksurfaces are 1 1 /4 thick with square edge or tapered edge option tapering to 1 /2 thick front edge. 1. Specify finish group: L - Laminate M- Laminate/veneer edge 1 - Veneer group Veneer group Veneer group 3 2. Specify worksurface finish. 3. Specify grommet color: Easy grey Black Crinion 30 D worksurfaces corrrespond in width to table bases, which are specified separately. 48 W worksurfaces plan on 12 wide or 20 wide bases. 60 W worksurfaces plan on 5, 10, 15 and 20 wide bases. 72 W worksurfaces plan on 6, 12 and 18 wide bases. Edge grommet accommodates most power cord plugs up to 1 deep. Actual worksurface depth is 21.85, or

30 Worksurfaces with cord drop description nominal depth w d h pattern number L M V1 V2 V3 Worksurface, tapered edge /4 XTTK4824C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) $494. $631. $631. $722. $ /4 XTTK6024C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK7224C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK9624C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,060. 1, /4 XTTK4830C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK6030C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK7230C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK9630C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,131. 1, /4 XTTK4836C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK6036C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,009. 1, /4 XTTK7236C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,023. 1, /4 XTTK9636C (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,051. 1,051. 1,207. 1,569. Worksurface, veneer square edge /4 XTTS4824C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS6024C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS7224C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS9624C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS4830C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS6030C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS7230C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS9630C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a , /4 XTTS4836C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS6036C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS7236C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a , /4 XTTS9636C (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a ,278. Crinion Open Table Worksurface, postformed plastic /4 XTTP4824C (L) ( ) 278. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP6024C (L) ( ) 362. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP7224C (L) ( ) 426. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP9624C (L) ( ) 496. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP4830C (L) ( ) 304. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP6030C (L) ( ) 393. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP7230C (L) ( ) 465. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP9630C (L) ( ) 549. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP4836C (L) ( ) 338. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP6036C (L) ( ) 465. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP7236C (L) ( ) 527. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP9636C (L) ( ) 620. n/a n/a n/a n/a Specifications Example: XTTP6030CL 118 XT Crinion Open Table T Worksurface P Postformed plastic 60 Width 30 Depth C With cord drop L Finish type 118 Surface Worksurfaces are 1 1 /4 thick with square edge or tapered edge option tapering to 1 /2 thick front edge. Specify finishes: L - Laminate M- Laminate/veneer edge 1 - Veneer group Veneer group Veneer group 3 Crinion 30 D worksurfaces corrrespond in width to table bases, which are specified separately. 48 W worksurfaces plan on 12 wide or 20 wide bases. 60 W worksurfaces plan on 5, 10, 15 and 20 wide bases. 72 W worksurfaces plan on 6, 12 and 18 wide bases. Continous 1 /2 cord drop accommodates clamp-on flat screen monitor arm or most power cords. Actual worksurface depth is 21.85, or

31 End counters description nominal depth w l h pattern number L M V1 V2 V3 End counter, tapered edge /4 XTTK4824E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) $693. $892. $892. $984. $1, /4 XTTK6024E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,089. 1, /4 XTTK7224E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,037. 1,037. 1,158. 1, /4 XTTK4830E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,079. 1, /4 XTTK6030E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,055. 1,055. 1,173. 1, /4 XTTK7230E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,094. 1,094. 1,217. 1,506. End counter, veneer square edge /4 XTTS4824E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS6024E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS7224E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS4830E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS6030E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS7230E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a End counter for postformed plastic /4 XTTP4824E (L) ( ) 517. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP6024E (L) ( ) 613. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP7224E (L) ( ) 691. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP4830E (L) ( ) 580. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP6030E (L) ( ) 691. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP7230E (L) ( ) 826. n/a n/a n/a n/a * Note Example: XTTP6024EL 118 XT Crinion Open Table T Worksurface P Postformed plastic 60 Width 24 Length E End counter L Finish Type 118 Surface Specifications End counters are 1 1 /4 thick with square edge or tapered edge option tapering to 1 /2 thick front edge. End counters are tapered front and side edges only. Specify finishes: L - Laminate M- Laminate/veneer edge 1 - Veneer group Veneer group Veneer group 3 End counters mount at the ends of dual tables with two end counter cantilever brackets. Specify dual end legs for end counters instead of standard dual end legs (tables with end counters must be specified from components, not assemblies). Specify 48 W for dual 24 tables, 60 W for dual 30 tables and 72 W for dual 36 tables. End counters may not be used with end panel kits. Specify added length of 24 or 30 beyond end leg for end counters. * Note - End counters for postformed plastic are not available in these finishes: 121 Micro grey 129 Micro sand 122 Brushed sand 123 Brushed grey 30

32 Extended end counters description Extended end counter, tapered edge with hinged power access nominal depth w l h pattern no. L M V1 V2 V /4 XTTK4836D (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) $1,151. $1,336. $1,336. $1,456. $1, /4 XTTK6036D (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) 1,181. 1,393. 1,393. 1,516. 1, /4 XTTK7236D (L/M/1/2/3) ( )( ) 1,267. 1,500. 1,500. 1,631. 1,950. Extended end counter, tapered edge with grommet Extended end counter, veneer square edge with hinged power access /4 XTTK4836E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,037. 1,037. 1,158. 1, /4 XTTK6036E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,094. 1,094. 1,217. 1, /4 XTTK7236E (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,201. 1,201. 1,332. 1, /4 XTTS4836D (1/2/3) ( )( ) n/a n/a , /4 XTTS6036D (1/2/3) ( )( ) n/a n/a ,018. 1, /4 XTTS7236D (1/2/3) ( )( ) n/a n/a 1,018. 1,114. 1,376. Crinion Open Table Extended end counter, veneer square edge with grommet /4 XTTS4836E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS6036E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS7236E (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a ,077. Example: XTTP6036DL 118 AA XT Crinion Open Table T Worksurface P Postformed plastic 60 Width 36 Length D End counter,center hinged power access L Finish Type 118 Surface finish AA Access door finish Specifications End counters are 1 1 /4 thick with square edge or tapered edge option tapering to 1 /2 thick front edge. End counters are tapered front and side edges only. 1. Specify finish group: L - Laminate M- Laminate/veneer edge 1 - Veneer group Veneer group Veneer group 3 2. Specify worksurface finish. 3. Specify hinged access cover finish. Hinged access covers are available in AA anodized aluminum and all standard paint finishes except 613 Silver. 31 End counters mount at the ends of dual tables with two end counter cantilever brackets. Specify dual end legs for end counters instead of standard dual end legs (tables with end counters must be specified from components, not assemblies). Specify 48 W for dual 24 tables, 60 W for dual 30 tables and 72 W for dual 36 tables. End counters may not be used with end panel kits. Each extended end counter requires base assembly 12 longer than worksurfaces on each side. * Note - End counters for postformed plastic are not available in these finishes: 121 Micro grey 129 Micro sand 122 Brushed sand 123 Brushed grey

33 Extended end counters description Extended end counter, postformed plastic with hinged power access nominal depth w l h pattern no. L M V1 V2 V /4 XTTP4836D (L) ( )( ) $990. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP6036D (L) ( )( ) 1,125. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP7236D (L) ( )( ) 1,223. n/a n/a n/a n/a * Note Extended end counter, postformed plastic with grommet /4 XTTP4836E (L) ( ) 691. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP6036E (L) ( ) 826. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP7236E (L) ( ) 924. n/a n/a n/a n/a * Note Example: XTTP6036DL 118 AA XT Crinion Open Table T Worksurface P Postformed plastic 60 Width 36 Length D End counter,center hinged power access L Finish Type 118 Surface finish AA Access door finish Specifications End counters are 1 1 /4 thick with square edge or tapered edge option tapering to 1 /2 thick front edge. End counters are tapered front and side edges only. 1. Specify finish group: L - Laminate M- Laminate/veneer edge 1 - Veneer group Veneer group Veneer group 3 2. Specify worksurface finish. 3. Specify hinged access cover finish. Hinged access covers are available in AA anodized aluminum and all standard paint finishes except 613 Silver. 32 End counters mount at the ends of dual tables with two end counter cantilever brackets. Specify dual end legs for end counters instead of standard dual end legs (tables with end counters must be specified from components, not assemblies). Specify 48 W for dual 24 tables, 60 W for dual 30 tables and 72 W for dual 36 tables. End counters may not be used with end panel kits. Each extended end counter requires base assembly 12 longer than worksurfaces on each side. * Note - End counters for postformed plastic are not available in these finishes: 121 Micro grey 129 Micro sand 122 Brushed sand 123 Brushed grey

34 File tops description w d h pattern number L M V1 V2 V3 File top, tapered edge /4 XTTK3018F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) $362. $613. $600. $641. $ /4 XTTK3036F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK3618F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) /4 XTTK3636F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK4218F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK4236F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) , /4 XTTK6018F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,044. 1, /4 XTTK6036F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,009. 1,009. 1,139. 1, /4 XTTK7218F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,096. 1, /4 XTTK7236F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,024. 1,024. 1,154. 1, /4 XTTK8418F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,044. 1,044. 1,174. 1, /4 XTTK8436F (L/M/1/2/3) ( ) ,099. 1,099. 1,252. 1,589. File top, veneer square edge /4 XTTS3018F (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS3618F (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a /4 XTTS4218F (1/2/3) ( ) n/a n/a File top, postformed plastic /4 XTTP3018F (L) ( ) 246. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP3618F (L) ( ) 259. n/a n/a n/a n/a /4 XTTP4218F (L) ( ) 271. n/a n/a n/a n/a Crinion Open Table Example: XTTP4218FL 118 XT Crinion Open Table T Worksurface P Postformed 42 Width 18 Depth F File top L Finish type 118 Surface Specifications File tops are 1 1 /4 thick with square edge or tapered edge option tapering to 1 /2 thick front edge. Tapered edge file tops are tapered front and back edges only. Specify finishes: L - Laminate M - Laminate/veneer edge 1 - Veneer group Veneer group Veneer group 3 File tops correspond to 30,36 or 42 W lateral files. File tops on 2 high Calibre files positioned perpendicular to the Crinion Open Table serve as a worksurface return. 33

35 Complete base assemblies fixed height 24 D dual description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D10CF ( )( ) $9,276. $9, dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D12CF ( )( ) 9,664. 9, dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D15CF ( )( ) 11, ,438. Base assembly, segmented dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D15SF ( )( ) 11, ,255. Base assembly, with intermediate leg dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D18SF ( )( ) 13, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D20SF ( )( ) 14, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D24SF ( )( ) 15, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 24D25SF ( )( ) 16, ,651. Specifications Example: XTB1BAS24D10CF 613 AA XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 24 Depth D Dual 10 Width C Continuous F Fixed height 613 Base finish AA Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. Fixed height base assemblies have shared cantilever brackets for adjacent worksurfaces and midspan support brackets for every worksurface. 1. Specify painted finish for base assembly. For leg and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify finish for top channel. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, mid span support brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : four 60 x24 D worksurfaces 12 : four 72 x24 D worksurfaces 15 : six 60 X24 D worksurfaces 18 : six 72 x24 D worksurfaces 20 : eight 60 x24 D worksurfaces 24 : eight 72 x24 D worksurfaces 25 : ten 60 x24 D worksurfaces 34

36 Complete base assemblies fixed height 24 D single sided description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S10CF ( )( ) $8,346. $8, single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S12CF ( )( ) 8,736. 8, single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S15CF ( )( ) 9, ,149. Base assembly, segmented single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S15SF ( )( ) 10, ,963. Base assembly, with intermediate leg single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S18SF ( )( ) 11, , single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S20SF ( )( ) 12, , single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S24SF ( )( ) 13, , single sided /2 XTB1 BAS 24S25SF ( )( ) 14, ,660. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1BAS24S10CF XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 24 Depth S Single 10 Width C Continuous F Fixed height 613 Base finish 118 Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. Fixed height base assemblies have shared cantilever brackets for adjacent worksurfaces and midspan support brackets for every worksurface. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, mid span support brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : two 60 x24 D worksurfaces 12 : two 72 x24 D worksurfaces 15 : three 60 X24 D worksurfaces 18 : three 72 x24 D worksurfaces 20 : four 60 x24 D worksurfaces 24 : four 72 x24 D worksurfaces 25 : five 60 x24 D worksurfaces 35

37 Complete base assemblies fixed height 30 D dual description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D10CF ( )( ) $11,039. $11, dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D12CF ( )( ) 11, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D15CF ( )( ) 13, ,720. Base assembly, segmented dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D15SF ( )( ) 14, ,847. Base assembly, with intermediate leg dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D18SF ( )( ) 16, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D20SF ( )( ) 17, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D24CF ( )( ) 18, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D25CF ( )( ) 20, ,711. Specifications Example: XTB1BAS30D18SF XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 30 Depth D Dual 18 Width S Segmented F Fixed height 613 Base finish 111 Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. Fixed height base assemblies have shared cantilever brackets for adjacent worksurfaces and midspan support brackets for every worksurface. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, mid span support brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : four 60 x30 D worksurfaces 12 : four 72 x30 D worksurfaces 15 : six 60 X30 D worksurfaces 18 : six 72 x30 D worksurfaces 20 : eight 60 x30 D worksurfaces 24 : eight 72 x30 D worksurfaces 25 : ten 60 x30 D worksurfaces 36

38 Complete base assemblies fixed height 30 D single sided description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S10CF ( )( ) $9,716. $9, single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S12CF ( )( ) 10, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S15CF ( )( ) 11, ,853. Base assembly, segmented single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S15SF ( )( ) 10, ,100. Base assembly, with intermediate leg single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S18SF ( )( ) 11, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S20SF ( )( ) 13, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S24SF ( )( ) 16, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S25SF ( )( ) 17, ,403. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1BAS30S15CF XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 30 Depth S Single 15 Width C Continuous F Fixed height 613 Base finish 115 Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. Fixed height base assemblies have shared cantilever brackets for adjacent worksurfaces and midspan support brackets for every worksurface. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, mid span support brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : two 60 x30 D worksurfaces 12 : two 72 x30 D worksurfaces 15 : three 60 X30 D worksurfaces 18 : three 72 x30 D worksurfaces 20 : four 60 x30 D worksurfaces 24 : four 72 x30 D worksurfaces 25 : five 60 x30 D worksurfaces 37

39 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 30 D dual description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D10CA ( )( ) $11,202. $11, dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D12CA ( )( ) 11, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D15CA ( )( ) 13, ,220. Base assembly, segmented dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D15SA ( )( ) 14, ,349. Base assembly, with intermediate leg dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D18SA ( )( ) 16, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D20SA ( )( ) 18, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D24CA ( )( ) 19, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 30D25CA ( )( ) 21, ,864. Specifications Example: XTB1BAS30D18SA XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 30 Depth D Dual 18 Width S Segmented A Adjustable height 613 Base finish 118 Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : four 60 x30 D worksurfaces 12 : four 72 x30 D worksurfaces 15 : six 60 X30 D worksurfaces 18 : six 72 x30 D worksurfaces 20 : eight 60 x30 D worksurfaces 24 : eight 72 x30 D worksurfaces 25 : ten 60 x30 D worksurfaces 38

40 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 30 D single sided description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S10CA ( )( ) $9,824. $10, single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S12CA ( )( ) 10, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S15CA ( )( ) 11, ,140. Base assembly, segmented single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S15SA ( )( ) 11, ,390. Base assembly, with intermediate leg single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S18SA ( )( ) 12, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S20SA ( )( ) 13, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S24SA ( )( ) 16, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 30S25SA ( )( ) 17, ,041. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1BAS30S18SA 613 AA XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 30 Depth S Single 18 Width S Segmented A Adjustable height 613 Base finish AA Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : two 60 x30 D worksurfaces 12 : two 72 x30 D worksurfaces 15 : three 60 X30 D worksurfaces 18 : three 72 x30 D worksurfaces 20 : four 60 x30 D worksurfaces 24 : four 72 x30 D worksurfaces 25 : five 60 x30 D worksurfaces 39

41 Complete base assemblies fixed height 36 D dual description nominal w h d pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D10CF ( )( ) $11,188. $11, dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D12CF ( )( ) 11, , dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D15CF ( )( ) 13, ,920. Base assembly, segmented dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D15SF ( )( ) 14, ,049. Base assembly, with intermediate leg dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D18SF ( )( ) 16, , dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D20SF ( )( ) 18, , dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D24CF ( )( ) 19, , dual /2 54 XTB1 BAS 36D25CF ( )( ) 20, ,011. Specifications Example: XTB1BAS36D18SF XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 36 Depth D Dual 18 Width S Segmented F Fixed height 613 Base finish 111 Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. Fixed height base assemblies have shared cantilever brackets for adjacent worksurfaces and midspan support brackets for every worksurface. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, mid span support brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : four 60 x36 D worksurfaces 12 : four 72 x36 D worksurfaces 15 : six 60 X36 D worksurfaces 18 : six 72 x36 D worksurfaces 20 : eight 60 x36 D worksurfaces 24 : eight 72 x36 D worksurfaces 25 : ten 60 x36 D worksurfaces 40

42 Complete base assemblies fixed height 36 D single sided description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S10CF ( )( ) $9,866. $10, single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S12CF ( )( ) 10, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S15CF ( )( ) 11, ,053. Base assembly, segmented single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S15SF ( )( ) 11, ,302. Base assembly, with intermediate leg single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S18SF ( )( ) 12, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S20SF ( )( ) 13, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S24SF ( )( ) 16, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S25SF ( )( ) 17, ,705. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1BAS36S18SF 613 AA XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 36 Depth S Single 18 Width S Segmented F Fixed height 613 Base finish AA Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. Fixed height base assemblies have shared cantilever brackets for adjacent worksurfaces and midspan support brackets for every worksurface. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, mid span support brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : two 60 x36 D worksurfaces 12 : two 72 x36 D worksurfaces 15 : three 60 X36 D worksurfaces 18 : three 72 x36 D worksurfaces 20 : four 60 x36 D worksurfaces 24 : four 72 x36 D worksurfaces 25 : five 60 x36 D worksurfaces 41

43 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 36 D dual description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D10CA ( )( ) $11,352. $11, dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D12CA ( )( ) 11, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D15CA ( )( ) 14, ,422. Base assembly, segmented dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D15SA ( )( ) 15, ,548. Base assembly, with intermediate leg dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D18SA ( )( ) 16, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D20SA ( )( ) 18, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D24CA ( )( ) 19, , dual /2 XTB1 BAS 36D25CA ( )( ) 21, ,165. Specifications Example: XTB1BAS36D18SA XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 36 Depth D Dual 18 Width S Segmented A Adjustable height 613 Base finish 115 Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : four 60 x36 D worksurfaces 12 : four 72 x36 D worksurfaces 15 : six 60 X36 D worksurfaces 18 : six 72 x36 D worksurfaces 20 : eight 60 x36 D worksurfaces 24 : eight 72 x36 D worksurfaces 25 : ten 60 x36 D worksurfaces 42

44 Complete base assemblies adjustable height 36 D single sided description nominal w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Base assembly, continuous 10 single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S10CA ( )( ) $9,973. $10, single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S12CA ( )( ) 10, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S15CA ( )( ) 12, ,342. Base assembly, segmented single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S15SA ( )( ) 11, ,591. Base assembly, with intermediate leg single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S18SA ( )( ) 12, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S20SA ( )( ) 14, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S24SA ( )( ) 16, , single sided / /2 XTB1 BAS 36S25SA ( )( ) 17, ,343. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1BAS36S18SA 613 AA XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components BAS Assembly 36 Depth S Single 18 Width S Segmented A Adjustable height 613 Base finish AA Top channel finish Base assemblies include end legs, beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, channels and end caps. 1. Specify base finish for base assembly. For legs and cantilever brackets specify one paint finish for all. 2. Specify top channel finish. AA anodized aluminum and all paint finishes are available except 613 Silver. Beams are anodized aluminum only. Complete base assemblies include all base components necessary to support worksurfaces. Specify screens, power components and cable trays separately. Base assemblies include end legs, intermediate leg (where required), beams, trusses, cantilever brackets, top channel and end caps. No table on this page has beams longer than 15. Base assemblies correspond to: 10 : two 60 x36 D worksurfaces 12 : two 72 x36 D worksurfaces 15 : three 60 X36 D worksurfaces 18 : three 72 x36 D worksurfaces 20 : four 60 x36 D worksurfaces 24 : four 72 x36 D worksurfaces 25 : five 60 x36 D worksurfaces 43

45 Top channels description nominal w d h pattern number list price Top channel /2 2 XTC1 48 ( ) $ /2 2 XTC1 60 ( ) /2 2 XTC1 72 ( ) /2 2 XTC1 96 ( ) /2 2 XTC1 120 AA /2 2 XTC1 144 AA 502. Top channel end cap 2 1 /2 2 XTC1 END ( ) 38. Top channel for frameless glass addups /2 2 XTCA1 48 ( ) /2 2 XTCA1 60 ( ) /2 2 XTCA1 72 ( ) /2 2 XTCA1 96 ( ) /2 2 XTCA1 120 AA /2 2 XTCA1 144 AA 702. Top channel filler 48 XTCF 48 ( ) XTCF 60 ( ) XTCF 72 ( ) 43. Specifications Example: XTC1120AA XT Crinion open table C1 Top channel 120 Width AA Finish Top channels are extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish AA or any standard painted finish except 613 Silver. Top channel end caps are die cast aluminum AA or any standard painted finish except 613 Silver. Top channel filler is 812 Easy Grey or 111 Black. Crinion Open Table top channel supports privacy screens and suspended raceway components at any point. Top channel is required at the center of dual tables. Top channels and end caps are included in complete base assemblies. Top channels correspond in width to one or two worksurface widths. 44

46 Beams for single sided or dual tables 24 D description nominal w d h pattern number list price Starter beam set for 24 D XTB1TB5C $1, XTB1TB6C 1, XTB1TB8C 1, XTB1TB10C 1, XTB1TB12C 2, XTB1TB15C 2,630. Extension beam set for 24 D tables XTB1TB4E 1, XTB1TB5E 1, XTB1TB6E 1, XTB1TB8E 2, XTB1TB10E 2, XTB1TB12E 2, XTB1TB15E 3,133. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1TB15C XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components TB Dual beam set 15 Width C Starter Beams are extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish. Crinion Open Table bases are assembled from beams, end legs or end panels, intermediate legs and trusses. Beam sets can be used with either dual or single sided tables. Table bases require one starter beam and extension beam adding up to the length as the sum of the worksurface widths on one side. Beam sets must be supported by intermediate legs at least every 16. Intermediate leg must be positioned at beam truss location, where two worksurfaces meet. Extension beam sets are specified only to add on to starter sets or other extension beams. 45

47 Beams for dual tables 30 and 36 D description nominal w h pattern number list price Starter beam set for dual table 30 or 36 (pair of beams) XTB1DB5C $1, XTB1DB6C 1, XTB1DB8C 2, XTB1DB10C 2, XTB1DB12C 2, XTB1DB15C 3,384. Extension beam set for dual table 30 or 36 (pair of beams) XTB1DB4E 2, XTB1DB5E 2, XTB1DB6E 2, XTB1DB8E 2, XTB1DB10E 3, XTB1DB12E 3, XTB1DB15E 3,885. Specifications Example: XTB1DB15C XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components DB Dual beam set 15 Width C Starter Beams are extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish. Beam sets are starter or extension. Extension beam sets are specified only to add on to starter sets or other extension beams. Crinion Open Table bases are assembled from beams, end legs or end panels, intermediate legs and trusses. Beam sets may be used with either worksurface depth. Dual tables require one pair of main beams of the same nominal width as the sum of the worksurfaces on each side. Beam sets must be supported by intermediate legs at least every 16. Intermediate leg must be positioned at beam truss location, where two worksurfaces meet. 46

48 Beams for single sided tables 30 and 36 D description nominal w d h pattern number list price Starter beam set for single sided table 30 or 36 ( main and back beam) XTB1SB5C $1, XTB1SB6C 1, XTB1SB8C 1, XTB1SB10C 2, XTB1SB12C 2, XTB1SB15C 2,881. Extension beam set for single sided table 30 or 36 ( main and back beam ) XTB1SB4E 1, XTB1SB5E 1, XTB1SB6E 1, XTB1SB8E 2, XTB1SB10E 2, XTB1SB12E 3, XTB1SB15E 3,384. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1DB15C XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components DB Dual beam set 15 Width C Starter Beams are extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish. Beam sets are starter or extension. Extension beam sets are specified only to add on to starter sets or other extension beams. Crinion Open Table bases are assembled from beams, end legs or end panels, intermediate legs and trusses. Beam sets may be used with either worksurface depth. Single sided tables require one pair of main beams of the same nominal width as the sum of the worksurfaces on each side. Beam sets must be supported by intermediate legs at least every 16. Intermediate leg must be positioned at beam truss location, where two worksurfaces meet. 47

49 End legs, intermediate leg sets for dual tables description application w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 End leg for dual tables (pair of legs for 36 D worksurface) 24 D worksurface XTB1EDD24 ( ) $4,535. $4, D worksurface XTB1EDD30 ( ) 4,535. 4, D worksurface XTB1EDD36 ( ) 4,535. 4,762. Intermediate leg for dual table (pair of legs for 30 and 36 D) 24 D worksurfaces /4 16 XTB2LDD24 ( ) &36 D worksurfaces /4 16 XTB2LDD ( ) Shroud for intermediate leg infeed kit 24 D or single sided 3 3 /4 2 1 /2 15 XTB1 SLIK ( ) D XTB1 SLIK30 ( ) D XTB1 SLIK36 ( ) End leg for end counters both ends (pair of legs for 36 D worksurface) 48 W end counter XTB1XDD24 ( ) 4,848. 5, W end counter XTB1XDD30 ( ) 4,848. 5, W end counter XTB1XDD36 ( ) 4,848. 5,076. Specifications Example: XTB1EDD XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components E End leg D Dual D Desk height 30 Depth of tops 118 Finish Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Crinion Open Table bases are assembled from main beams, end legs or end panels, intermediate legs and trusses. After selecting starter or segmented beam sets, specify legs to support each end of beams. End legs support main beams at each end of a table. Dual end legs for end counters have threaded metal inserts on the outside of the leg to accept two fixed height or adjustable cantilevers for end counters. Intermediate legs must be specified to provide support under beam sets spanning longer than 16. Intermediate legs may be positioned under beams at any beam truss location. End legs include beam end plates and hardware. Shroud for intermediate leg kit encloses the space between legs to protect power, data and communication cables between floor and table base. Side covers may be removed for access. Shroud for 24 d intermediate leg is U-shaped cover that attaches to side of intermediate leg for 24 dorany single sided intermediate leg. End legs for 24 D worksurfaces and end legs for 48 W end counters have only one end plate for attaching a single centered beam for 24 D tables. End legs for 30 D and 36 D worksurfaces and end legs for 60 W and 72 W end counters have two end plates for attaching two beams for 30 D and 36 D tables. 48

50 End legs, intermediate leg sets for dual tables description application w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 End leg for end counters one end only (pair of legs for 36 D worksurface) 48 W end counter XTB1YDD24 ( ) $4,693. $4, W end counter XTB1YDD30 ( ) 4,693. 4, W end counter XTB1YDD36 ( ) 4,693. 4,918. Crinion Open Table Specifications Example: XTB1EDD XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components E End leg D Dual D Desk height 30 Depth of tops 118 Finish Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Crinion Open Table bases are assembled from main beams, end legs or end panels, intermediate legs and trusses. After selecting starter or segmented beam sets, specify legs to support each end of beams. End legs support main beams at each end of a table. Dual end legs for end counters have threaded metal inserts on the outside of the leg to accept two fixed height or adjustable cantilevers for end counters. Intermediate legs must be specified to provide support under beam sets spanning longer than 16. Intermediate legs may be positioned under beams at any beam truss location. End legs include beam end plates and hardware. Shroud for intermediate leg kit encloses the space between legs to protect power, data and communication cables between floor and table base. Side covers may be removed for access. Shroud for 24 d intermediate leg is U-shaped cover that attaches to side of intermediate leg for 24 dorany single sided intermediate leg. End legs for 24 D worksurfaces and end legs for 48 W end counters have only one end plate for attaching a single centered beam for 24 D tables. End legs for 30 D and 36 D worksurfaces and end legs for 60 W and 72 W end counters have two end plates for attaching two beams for 30 D and 36 D tables. 49

51 End legs, intermediate leg sets for single sided tables description application width depth height pattern number P1/P2 P3 End leg for single sided tables (pair of legs) 24 D worksurface XTB1ESD24 ( ) $4,535. $4, D worksurface /4 24 XTB1ESD30 ( ) 4,535. 4, D worksurface /4 24 XTB1ESD36 ( ) 4,535. 4,762. Intermediate leg for single sided table 24 D worksurfaces /4 16 XTB2LSD24 ( ) &36 D worksurfaces /4 16 XTB2LSD ( ) Specifications Example: XTB1ESD XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components E End leg S Single D Desk height 30 Depth of tops 118 Finish Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Crinion Open Table bases are assembled from main beams, end legs or end panels, intermediate legs and trusses. After selecting starter or segmented beam sets, specify legs to support each end of beams. End legs support main beams at each end of a table. Dual end legs for end counters have threaded metal inserts on the outside of the leg to accept two fixed height or adjustable cantilvers for end counters. Intermediate legs must be specified to provide support under beam sets spanning longer than 16. Intermediate legs may be positioned under beams at any beam truss location. End legs include beam end plates and hardware. Shroud for intermediate leg kit encloses the space between legs to protect power, data and communication cables between floor and table base. Side covers may be removed for access. 50

52 End panels for dual tables and single sided tables, painted description application width depth height pattern no. P1/P2/P3 End panels for dual tables (pair of end panels) 24 D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP2DD24P( )( ) $2, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP2DD30P( )( ) 3, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP2DD36P( )( ) 3,589. End panels for dual tables (single end panel) 24 D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP1DD24P( )( ) 1, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP1DD30P( )( ) 1, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP1DD36P( )( ) 1,794. End panels for single sided tables (pair of end panels) 24 D worksurface 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP2SD24P( )( ) 2, D worksurface 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP2SD30P( )( ) 3, D worksurface 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP2SD36P( )( ) 3,154. Crinion Open Table End panels for single sided tables (single end panel) LH Shown RH Opposite 24 D worksurface, Left 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1LD24P( )( ) 1, D worksurface, Right 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1RD24P( )( ) 1, D worksurface, Left 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1LD30P( )( ) 1, D worksurface, Right 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1RD30P( )( ) 1, D worksurface, Left 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1LD36P( )( ) 1, D worksurface, Right 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1RD36P( )( ) 1,577. Example: XTB1EP2DD 24P XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components EP2 End panel D Dual D Desk Height 24 Depth of tops P Finish 118 Finish 118 Finish Specification Specify paint finish for brackets, then specify paint finish for end panel. End panels may be specified as an alternative to End legs to support each end of beams. End panel kits include end panel, connecting hardware and support legs. End panel kits are not compatible with end counters. 51

53 End panels for dual tables and single sided tables, laminate and veneer description application w d h pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 End panels for dual tables (pair of end panels) 24 D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP2DD24( )( ) $2,502. $2,610. $3,154. $3, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP2DD30( )( ) 3,479. 3,698. 4,242. 4, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP2DD36( )( ) 3,698. 3,807. 4,459. 4,676. End panel for dual tables (single end panel) 24 D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP1DD24( )( ) 1,250. 1,305. 1,577. 1, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP1DD30( )( ) 1,740. 1,849. 2,121. 2, D worksurface 1 1 / /2 XTB1EP1DD36( )( ) 1,849. 1,903. 2,229. 2,338. End panels for single sided tables (pair of end panels) 24 D worksurface 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP2SD24( )( ) 2,229. 2,393. 2,719. 2, D worksurface 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP2SD30( )( ) 3,154. 3,371. 3,698. 3, D worksurface 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP2SD36( )( ) 3,262. 3,479. 3,915. 4,132. End panel for single sided tables (single end panel) LH Shown RH Opposite 24 D worksurface, Left 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1LD24( )( ) 1,115. 1,197. 1,359. 1, D worksurface, Right 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1RD24( )( ) 1,115. 1,197. 1,359. 1, D worksurface, Left 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1LD30( )( ) 1,577. 1,686. 1,849. 1, D worksurface, Right 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1RD30( )( ) 1,577. 1,686. 1,849. 1, D worksurface, Left 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1LD36( )( ) 1,632. 1,740. 1,957. 2, D worksurface, Right 1 1 / / /2 XTB1EP1RD36( )( ) 1,632. 1,740. 1,957. 2,066. Example: XTB1EP2DD XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components EP2 End panel D Dual D Desk Height 24 Depth of tops 118 Finish 118 Finish Specifications Specify paint finish for brackets, then specify laminate or veneer finish for end panel. Brushed and woodgrain laminates are not available on 70 wide end panels for use on 36 D dual sided tables. End panels may be specified as an alternative to End legs to support each end of beams. End panel kits include end panel, connecting hardware and support legs. End panel kits are not compatible with end counters. 52

54 Beam trusses description application w d h pattern number P1/P2/P3 Beam truss for dual tables 30 D worksurface XTB1XD30 ( ) $ D worksurface XTB1XD36 ( ) 602. Top channel support 24 D worksurface XTB1T24 ( ) 200. Beam truss for single sided tables 30 D worksurface 3 XTB1XS30 ( ) D worksurface 3 XTB1XS36 ( ) 602. Beam truss for dual tables no top channel support 30 D worksurface XTB1XD30N ( ) D worksurface XTB1XD36N ( ) 490. Crinion Open Table Beam truss for single sided tables no top channel support 30 D worksurface 3 XTB1XS30N ( ) D worksurface 3 XTB1XS36N ( ) 490. Specifications Example: XTB1XD XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components XD Beam truss for dual table 30 Depth 613 Finish Beam trusses are available in all standard painted finishes. Crinion Open Table bases are assembled from beams, end legs or end panels, intermediate legs and trusses. After selecting beams and leg kits, specify trusses between beams. Specify beam trusses adjacent to each end leg and at each worksurface junction. For 24 D tables specify top channel support instead of truss. Beam trusses with no top channel support must be specified in combination with intermediate legs planned other than at worksurface junctions (as for cable infeed shrouds). 53

55 Worksurface support cantilever and mid span support description w d h pattern number P1/P2 P3 Cantilever, fixed height 30 or 36 D XTB1FC ( ) $227. $237. Cantilever, fixed height 24 D XTB1FC24 ( ) Cantilever, adjustable height 30 or 36 D XTB1AC ( ) Cantilever, adjustable height 24 D XTB1AC24 ( ) Mid span support XTB1MB ( ) Specifications Example: XTB1FC 118 XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components FC Fixed height cantilever 118 Finish Specify paint finish code after pattern number. 48 worksurfaces: shared cantilevers each end or two adjustable per worksurface. 60 and 72 worksurfaces: shared cantilevers each end plus mid span support or two adjustable cantilevers inset worksurfaces: shared cantilevers at ends plus one in center or three adjustable cantilevers. 96 x24 with hinged door: shared cantilever each end plus two mid span supports. 96 x30 with hinged door: shared cantilever each end plus 24 d cantilever as center support. 96 x36 with hinged door: shared cantilever each end plus 24,30 or 36 d cantilever as center support. Cantilever brackets are required to support each end of worksurfaces. Brackets can be positioned at ends of worksurface, or inset at legs or floorstanding pedestal locations. Fixed height cantilevers can be shared between adjacent worksurfaces. Mid span support bracket must be specified for worksurface spans exceeding 4. Fixed height cantilever supports worksurface at 28 1 /2 H. Adjustable cantilevers enable worksurfaces to be set at 27,27 3 /4, 28 1 /2,29 1 /4 or 30 H. 54

56 Worksurface support linking plate and cantilever for end counters description w d h pattern no. P1/P2 P3 Cantilever for end counters, fixed height XTB1FCEND ( ) $227. $237. Cantilever for end counters, adjustable height XTB1ACEND ( ) Worksurface linking plate XTB1LP 31. Crinion Open Table Specification Example: XTB1FCEND 613 XT Crinion Open Table B1 Base components FC Fixed height cantilever END for end counter 613 Finish Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Cantilever brackets are required to support each end of worksurface. Brackets attach to inserts on the outside face of end legs for end counters. Fixed height cantilever supports for end counter at 28 1 /2 H. Adjustable cantilevers for end counter enables end counter to be set at 28 1 /2,29 1 /4 or 30 H. A linking plate is recommended to join adjacent worksurfaces that are independently supported at the same height. Specify two linking plates at the junction of two worksurfaces, or four total for each end counter to two worksurfaces. A linking plate is not required where adjacent tops are supported by a shared fixed height cantilever bracket, as with complete fixed height base assemblies. Linking plates are recommended for complete adjustable height base assemblies in which tops are set at the same height. 55

57 Modular Raceway eight-wire Raceway with covers description type h w d pattern number list price Dual raceway, two power + two data outlets each side XTR1E30D ( ) $297. Dual raceway, four power + two data outlets each side XTR1E424D ( ) 426. Flat end cover XTR1FE ( ) 26. Extended end cover XTR1EE ( ) 26. Single sided raceway two power + two data outlets one side XTR1E30S ( ) 297. Single sided raceway four power + two data outlets one side XTR1E424S ( ) 426. Specifications Applications notes Example: XTR1E424D 613 XT Crinion Open Table R1 Raceway E Eight wire system 42 Width 4 Extra outlets D Dual Raceway 613 Finish Eight wire 2+2 has two sets of circuits, each set with a separate ground and neutral. Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Covers have two openings for data/com outlet modules (Decora-size, specified separately). Raceway for Crinion Open Table is suspended from the top channel. For ideal access, worksurfaces should be specified with hinged power access. Each raceway requires four or eight duplex outlets, on any of four circuits. Jumpers connect power from one raceway to another. To join power between 30 raceways: specify 30 jumper for 60 desks and specify 42 jumper for 72 desks. To join power between 42 raceways: specify 18 jumper for 60 desks and 30 jumper for 72 desks. Flat end covers enclose the end of a raceway at the end of a table. Extended end covers enclose the end of a raceway at the end of a table where power infeed is located. Specify outlet fillers separately for unused outlet openings. 56

58 Modular Raceway eight-wire Raceway components description type h w d pattern number list price Modular infeed XTR1EPI $224. NYC infeed kit XTR1EPH 512. Jumper 18 XTR1EJ XTR1EJ XTR1EJ Duplex outlet Circuit A XTR1DA 38. Circuit B XTR1DB 38. Circuit X, orange XTR1DXO 43. Circuit Y, orange XTR1DYO 43. Crinion Open Table Outlet filler Set of 10 XTR1OF 32. PDC module extension kit Set of 10 XTR1PDCX 131. Compact Power Module XTR1ECPM ( ) 553. Specifications Example: XTR1EJ18 XT Crinion Open Table R1 Raceway E Eight wire J Jumper 18 Width Eight wire 2+2 has two sets of circuits, each set with a separate ground and neutral. Raceway for Crinion Open Table is suspended from the top channel. For ideal access, worksurfaces should be specified with hinged power access. Each raceway requires four or eight duplex outlets, on any of four circuits. Power infeed includes pigtail for connection to building power supply and connector to either end of any raceway. Jumper length is difference between worksurface width and specified raceway width. Compact power module is designed to supply power outlets under extended end counter worksurfaces, or additional outlets under desks. Compact power module can be suspended from top channel or attached to inside face of beams. Each face of compact power module accepts two duplex outlets. NYC infeed kit includes junction box that mounts to inside face of beams in table base. 57

59 Modular Raceway ten-wire Raceway with covers description type h w d pattern number list price Dual raceway, two power + two data outlets each side XTR1T30D ( ) $311. Dual raceway, four power + two data outlets each side XTR1T424D ( ) 440. Flat end cover XTR1FE ( ) 26. Extended end cover XTR1EE ( ) 26. Single sided raceway two power + two data outlets one side XTR1T30S ( ) 311. Single sided raceway four power + two data outlets one side XTR1T424S ( ) 440. Specifications Example: XTR1T424D 613 XT Crinion Open Table R1 Raceway T Ten wire system 42 Width 4 Extra outlets D Dual Raceway 613 Finish Ten wire 3+3 has two sets of three circuits, each set with a separate ground and neutral. Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Covers have two openings for data/com outlet modules (Decora-size, specified separately). Raceway for Crinion Open Table is suspended from the top channel. For ideal access, worksurfaces should be specified with hinged power access. Each raceway requires four or eight duplex outlets, on any of six circuits. Jumpers connect power from one raceway to another. To join power between 30 raceways: specify 30 jumper for 60 desks and specify 42 jumper for 72 desks. To join power between 42 raceways: specify 18 jumper for 60 desks and 30 jumper for 72 desks. Flat end covers enclose the end of a raceway at the end of a table. Extended end covers enclose the end of a raceway at the end of a table where power infeed is located. Specify outlet fillers separately for unused outlet openings. 58

60 Modular Raceway ten-wire Raceway components description type h w d pattern number list pricing Modular infeed XTR1TPI $251. NYC infeed kit XTR1TPH 512. Jumper 18 XTR1TJ XTR1TJ XTR1TJ Duplex outlet Circuit A XTR1DA 38. Circuit B XTR1DB 38. Circuit C XTR1DC 38. Circuit X, orange XTR1DXO 43. Circuit Y, orange XTR1DYO 43. Circuit Z, orange XTR1DZO 43. Crinion Open Table Outlet filler Set of 10 XTR1OF 32. PDC module extension kit Set of 10 XTR1PDCX 131. Compact Power Module XTR1TCPM ( ) 569. Specifications Example: XTR1TJ18 XT Crinion Open Table R1 Raceway T Ten wire J Jumper 18 Width Ten wire 3+3 has two sets of three circuits, each set with a separate ground and neutral. Raceway for Crinion Open Table is suspended from the top channel. For ideal access, worksurfaces should be specified with hinged power access. Each raceway requires four or eight duplex outlets, on any of six circuits. Power infeed includes pigtail for connection to building power supply and connector to either end of any raceway. Jumper length is difference between worksurface width and specified raceway width. Compact power module is designed to supply power outlets under extended end counter worksurfaces, or additional outlets under desks. Compact power module can be suspended from top channel or attached to inside face of beams. Each face of compact power module accepts two duplex outlets. NYC infeed kit includes junction box that mounts to inside face of beams in table base. 59

61 Modular Raceway ten-wire Raceway with covers description type h w d pattern number list price Dual raceway, two power + two data outlets each side XTR1X30D ( ) $328. Dual raceway, four power + two data outlets each side XTR1X424D ( ) 462. Single sided raceway two power + two data outlets one side XTR1X30S ( ) 328. Single sided raceway four power + two data outlets one side XTR1X424S ( ) 462. Example: XTR1X424D 613 XT Crinion Open Table R1 Raceway X Ten wire Width 4 Extra outlets D Dual Raceway 613 Finish Specifications Ten wire has four circuits each with a separate neutral, plus a ground wire for circuit 1 and 2 and another ground for circuit 3 and 4. Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Covers have two openings for data/com outlet modules (Decora-size, specified separately). 60 Raceway for Crinion Open Table is suspended from the top channel. For ideal access, worksurfaces should be specified with hinged power access. Each raceway requires four or eight duplex outlets, on any of six circuits. Jumpers connect power from one raceway to another. To join power between 30 raceways: specify 30 jumper for 60 desks and specify 42 jumper for 72 desks. To join power between 42 raceways: specify 18 jumper for 60 desks and 30 jumper for 72 desks. Flat end covers enclose the end of a raceway at the end of a table. Extended end covers enclose the end of a raceway at the end of a table where power infeed is located. Specify outlet fillers separately for unused outlet openings.

62 Modular Raceway ten-wire Raceway components description type h w d pattern number list price Modular infeed XTR1XPI $264. NYC infeed kit XTR1XPH 537. Jumper 18 XTR1XJ XTR1XJ XTR1XJ Duplex outlet Circuit 1 XTR1D1 40. Circuit 2 XTR1D2 40. Circuit 3 XTR1D3 40. Circuit 4 XTR1D4 40. Crinion Open Table Compact Power Module XTR1XCPM ( ) 569. Example: XTR1XJ18 XT Crinion Open Table R1 Raceway X Ten wire J Jumper 18 Width Specifications Ten wire has four circuits each with a separate neutral, plus a ground wire for circuit 1 and 2 and another ground for circuit 3 and 4. All duplex outlets are black. 61 Raceway for Crinion Open Table is suspended from the top channel. For ideal access, worksurfaces should be specified with hinged power access. Each raceway requires four or eight duplex outlets, on any of six circuits. Power infeed includes pigtail for connection to building power supply and connector to either end of any raceway. NYC infeed kit includes junction box that mounts to inside face of beams in table base. Jumper length is difference between worksurface width and specified raceway width. Compact power module is designed to supply power outlets under extended end counter worksurfaces, or additional outlets under desks. Compact power module can be suspended from top channel or attached to inside face of beams. Each face of compact power module accepts two duplex outlets.

63 Hardwire Raceway description type h w d pattern number list price Dual raceway, two power + two data outlets each side XTR1H30D ( ) $647. Flat end cover XTR1FE ( ) 26. Extended end cover XTR1EE ( ) 26. Outlet filler Set of 10 XTR1OF 32. Example: XTR1H30D 613 XT Crinion Open Table R1 Raceway H Hard wire system 30 Width D Dual Raceway 613 Finish Specifications Specify paint finish code after pattern number. Hardwired raceway components are designed for use in City of Chicago installations. Covers have two openings for data/com outlet modules (Decora-size, by others). 62 Raceway for Crinion Open Table is suspended from the top channel. For ideal access, worksurfaces should be specified with hinged power access. Dual raceways are code-approved boxed with openings for two or four duplex outlets on each face, plus two additional openings for data/communications faceplates on each face. A continuous horizontal metal septum divides power wires and connections from data and communications cables. Each raceway requires Decora-type architecturual power outlets, internal wiring and connecting cables, supplied by electrical contractor. Flat end covers enclose the raceway at the end of a table. Extended end covers provide an opening on the underside to permit cables to enter the raceway. Specify outlet filler plates for unused outlet openings. Specify PDC extenders to create space behind data/com for cable distribution inside dual raceway.

64 Cable tray and cable clips description table size w d pattern number list price Cable trays, leg position, pair 5, 30 D 53 1 XTCT6030LD ( ) $269. 5, 36 D 53 4 XTCT6036LD ( ) , 30 D 65 1 XTCT7230LD ( ) , 36 D 65 4 XTCT7236LD ( ) 425. Cable trays, full width, pair 5, 30 D 60 1 XTCT6030D ( ) , 36 D 60 4 XTCT6036D ( ) , 30 D 72 1 XTCT7230D ( ) , 36 D 72 4 XTCT7236D ( ) 425. Data tray kit 42 XTDT42 ( ) 188. Data + excess cable tray kit 42 XTDTX42 ( ) 313. Crinion Open Table Truss cable clips, set of 25 XTR1TCC Beam cable clips, set of 50 XTR1BCC Random attachment kit, set of 10 XTB1RAK 87. Example: XTCT7230D 613 XT Crinion Open Table CT Cable tray 72 Width 30 Depth D Dual table 613 Finish Specifications Cable trays and Data tray kits are available in all standard paint finishes. Applications notes Cable trays are optional kits to manage cables on each side of dual table bases. Specify cable trays for leg position at each end of the table. Specify cable trays, full width for other positions. Data tray kit provides 3 wide horizontal open cable tray directly below either 30 or 42 W raceway module (at center of 60 or 72 desks). Data + excess tray kit provides two open trays below either raceway module, one 3 W and one 5 W. Truss cable clips manage cables between raceway. Specify 2 clips per truss (one set of 10 for each five trusses). Beam cable clips manage cables along the inside faces of each beam set. Random attachment kit is a set of ten M8 slot nuts for attaching various products to the Crinion Open Table beams or top channel. Specify appropriate M8 screws separately. 63

65 Beam mounted cable trays and cable baskets description application w d h pattern no. list Beam mounted cable tray 24 D tables /4 XTBT18 ( ) $ D tables /4 XTBT24 ( ) D tables /4 XTBT36 ( ) D tables /4 XTBT48 ( ) D tables /4 XTBT60 ( ) 123. Cable basket, XTWB Cable basket hangers From truss 30/36D only XTWTX ( ) 74. From truss at infeed shroud XTWTBSLIK ( ) 227. From main beam, 24D only XTWTB ( ) 74. From top channel, 30/36D only XTWTC ( ) 97. Specifications Example: XTBT XT Crinion Open Table BT Beam mounted cable tray 36 Width 118 Paint finish Beam mounted cable trays are available in any standard painted finish. Cable basket is zinc metal finish only. Basket hangers can be specified in any standard painted finish. Beam mounted cable trays may be inserted in slots on either face of Crinion Open Table main beams. On 24 D dual or single sided tables beam mounted cable trays are the only option for cable management other than the shallow channel on top of the beam or a cable basket. On 30 D and 36 D tables beam mounted trays may complement other cable tray options. Beam mounted cable trays must be segmented to fit between cantilever and midspan support brackets. For 48 W worksurfaces with shared cantilevers specify 36 W trays. For 60 W worksurfaces with shared cantilevers and midspan supports specify 24 W trays adjacent to end legs specify 18 W trays. For 96 W worksurfaces specify 36 W trays between supports. Specify 48 W trays for additional cable management between trusses on the inside face of beams on dual 30 D and 36 D tables with 60 worksurfaces. Specify 60 W trays on the inside face of beams on dual 30 D and 36 D tables with 72 W worksurfaces. Cable basket is suspended below the center of dual tables instead of or in addition to cable trays. Cable basket offers the most flexibility for managing large bundles of cables and for entering or exiting the tray at any point. Cable basket ships in 10 lengths and is cut to size in field. Specify cable basket hangers separately. Each hanger can suspend one end of a tray or two adjacent trays. Hanger from trusses is for 30 or 36 D dual or single sided tables. Hanger from main beam is for 24 D dual tables only. Hangers from top channel are for 30 or 36 D dual tables only. For 72 W worksurfaces with shared cantilevers and midspan supports specify 24 W trays. 64

66 Center screens Acrylic, slatwall, combination, marker or veneer surface description appl. w d h pattern no. Opal acrylic Trans. acrylic / Marker slatwall Comb. acrylic / slatwall V1 V2 V3 Center screen to 43 H /4 14 XTCS ( )( )( ) $908. $939. $1,442. n/a $1,252. $1,373. $1, /4 14 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,191. 1,249. 1,566. n/a 1,354. 1,495. 1, /4 14 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,252. 1,312. 1,692. n/a 1,423. 1,586. 1,941. acrylic shown Center screen to 43 H adjacent to end screen /4 14 XTCS ( )( )( ) ,442. n/a 1,252. 1,373. 1, /4 14 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,191. 1,249. 1,566. n/a 1,354. 1,495. 1, /4 14 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,252. 1,312. 1,692. n/a 1,423. 1,586. 1,941. acrylic shown Center screen to 50 H /4 21 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,064. 1,112. 1,692. 1,566. 1,374. 1,530. 1, /4 21 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,378. 1,467. 1,880. 1,818. 1,478. 1,667. 2, /4 21 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,442. 1,529. 2,069. 1,943. 1,531. 1,751. 2,263. slatwall shown Crinion Open Table Center screen to 50 H adjacent to end screen /4 21 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,064. 1,112. 1,692. 1,566. 1,374. 1,530. 1, /4 21 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,378. 1,467. 1,880. 1,818. 1,478. 1,667. 2, /4 21 XTCS ( )( )( ) 1,442. 1,529. 2,069. 1,943. 1,531. 1,751. 2,263. combination shown Example: XTCS16014A O 111 XT Crinion Open Table CS1 Center screen 60 Width 14 Height A Surface O Opal 111 Frame finish Specifications Acrylic surface is AO opal or AT translucent. For Marker surface both sides specify suffix M. For Slatwall screens specify slatwall and frame finish. For combination acrylic/slatwall screens specify suffixes CO (opal) or CT (translucent), slatwall and frame finish. Slatwall surface is available in (AA) or any standard painted finish except 613 Silver. For veneer surface specify suffix V and finish code from list on Crinion Open Table. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. 65 Center screens mount to continuous channel at center of tables. Specify 14 H screens for a 42 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 49 horizon. Horizons are maintained regardless of worksurface height. Combination screens include 14 high slatwall with acrylic above. Center screens include mounting hardware for standard top channel only. Center screens adjacent to end screens allow space for dual or single sided end screens. Slatwall screens require buttresses to support Knoll Extra flat screen monitor arm. Specify one buttress per monitor arm, up to four buttresses per screen. Slatwall screens will support flat panel monitor arms with varying weight limitations based on mounting and application. Please refer to the KnollExtra price list for comprehensive mounting and weight limitation information by application. Veneer grain direction is horizontal. Marker surface has wood core.

67 Center screens Tackable fabric surface description application w d h pattern no Center screen to 43 H /4 14 XTCS1 4814F ( )( )( ) $959. $977. $982. $1,002. $1,018. $1,018. $1, /4 14 XTCS1 6014F ( )( )( ) 1,048. 1,070. 1,074. 1,099. 1,120. 1,120. 1, /4 14 XTCS1 7214F ( )( )( ) 1,072. 1,100. 1,104. 1,136. 1,161. 1,161. 1,211. Center screen to 43 H adjacent to end screen /4 14 XTCS1 4714F ( )( )( ) ,008. 1,008. 1, /4 14 XTCS1 5914F ( )( )( ) 1,048. 1,070. 1,074. 1,099. 1,120. 1,120. 1, /4 14 XTCS1 7114F ( )( )( ) 1,072. 1,100. 1,104. 1,136. 1,161. 1,161. 1,211. Center screen to 50 H /4 21 XTCS1 4821F ( )( )( ) 1,017. 1,035. 1,038. 1,058. 1,074. 1,074. 1, /4 21 XTCS1 6021F ( )( )( ) 1,134. 1,160. 1,163. 1,187. 1,207. 1,207. 1, /4 21 XTCS1 7221F ( )( )( ) 1,145. 1,174. 1,179. 1,210. 1,235. 1,235. 1,285. Center screen to 50 H adjacent to end screen /4 21 XTCS1 4721F ( )( )( ) 1,017. 1,035. 1,038. 1,058. 1,074. 1,074. 1, /4 21 XTCS1 5921F ( )( )( ) 1,134. 1,160. 1,163. 1,187. 1,207. 1,207. 1, /4 21 XTCS1 7121F ( )( )( ) 1,145. 1,174. 1,179. 1,210. 1,235. 1,235. 1,285. Example: XTCS16014F20 (W2801) AA XT Crinion Open Table CS1 Center screen 60 Width 14 Height F Surface 20 Fabric grade W2801 Fabric AA Frame finish Specifications 1. Tackable fabric surface is suffix F. 2. Select fabric surface finish code from list on page Crinion Open Table. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Fabric is railroaded. Fabric center screens mount to continuous channel at center of tables. Specify 14 H screens for a 43 horizon. Specify 21 H screens fora50 horizon. Horizons are maintained regardless of worksurface height. Center screens include mounting hardward for standard top channel only. Center screens adjacent to end screens allow space for dual or single sided end screens. 66

68 Shelves, adapters and buttresses for slatwall screens description application w d h pattern no. list AA/paint L V1 V2 V3 Display shelf 5 D aluminum only 48 slatwall XT1DS4505 ( ) $ slatwall XT1DS5705 ( ) slatwall XT1DS6905 ( ) 338. Open shelf 9 D laminate or veneer only 48 slatwall XT1LS4509 ( )( ) slatwall XT1LS5709 ( )( ) slatwall XT1LS6909 ( )( ) Slatwall adapters for applied wall accessories 24 XT1SA24 ( ) XT1SA30 ( ) XT1SA36 ( ) XT1SA42 ( ) XT1SA48 ( ) XT1SA54 ( ) XT1SA60 ( ) XT1SA66 ( ) XT1SA72 ( ) 74. Crinion Open Table Buttress for slatwall screen XTCS1 SBA ( ) 250. Example: XT1LS AA XT1 Crinion Open Table LS Open shelf 57 Width 09 Depth 118 Shelf finish AA Platform finish Specifications Display shelves are anodized aluminum (AA) or any standard painted finish except silver. For open shelves specify any standard laminate or veneer finish, then platform finish. Shelf platform may be AA or any standard paint finish except silver. Slatwall adapters are integral color 812 Easy grey or 111 Black only. Open shelves and display shelves for slatwall are designed for use on Crinion Open Table center screens with slatwall inserts. Shelves include adapter that snaps into horizontal channels in slatwall, approximately every 2 vertically. Shelf width fits either full width center screens or screens adjacent to end screens. Slatwall adapters enable other Applied Wall System shelves and accessories to be mounted to Crinion Open Table slatwall. Adapter will also fit other Knoll system slatwalls, such as AutoStrada spine or panels, but use of shelves in these applications may not comply with ANSI/BIFMA safety standards for anti-dislodgment. 67

69 Side screens Acrylic, Marker or veneer surface description application w d h pattern no. list Opal acrylic Trans. acrylic / Marker V1 V2 V3 Side screen to 43 H 24 D worksurface /4 14 XTSS ( )( )( ) $658. $676. $991. $1,063. $1, D worksurface /4 14 XTSS ( )( )( ) ,023. 1,104. 1, D worksurface /4 14 XTSS ( )( )( ) ,050. 1,142. 1,311. acrylic shown Side screen to 50 H 24 D worksurface /4 21 XTSS ( )( )( ) ,061. 1,151. 1, D worksurface /4 21 XTSS ( )( )( ) ,095. 1,200. 1, D worksurface /4 21 XTSS ( )( )( ) ,126. 1,247. 1,487. acrylic shown Side screen brackets ( pair ) postformed edge XTSM1P ( ) 264. squared edge XTSM1S ( ) 187. tapered edge XTSM1K ( ) 187. Example: XTSS13014A O AA XT Crinion Open Table SS1 Side screen 30 Width 14 Height A Surface O Opal AA Frame finish Specifications 1. Specify surface A = Acrylic V = Veneer M = Marker 2. For Acrylic surface specify O = Opal T = Translucent Veneer surfaces may be any standard AutoStrada V1,V2 or V3 veneer. Specify veneer finish code from Crinion Open Table. Side screens clamp to front and back edge of worksurface at any point (except at hinged access door). Specify side screen brackets separately. Specify 14 H screens fora42 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 49 horizon. Side screens align in height with center screens when worksurfaces are set at 28 3 /8 H. Veneer grain direction is horizontal. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Brackets are available in all paint finishes 68

70 Side screens Tackable fabric surface description application w d h pattern no. list Side screen to 43 H 24 D worksurface /4 14 XTSS1 2414F ( )( )( ) $747. $755. $757. $769. $777. $777. $ D worksurface /4 14 XTSS1 3014F ( )( )( ) D worksurface /4 14 XTSS1 3614F ( )( )( ) Side screen to 50 H 24 D worksurface /4 21 XTSS1 2421F ( )( )( ) D worksurface /4 21 XTSS1 3021F ( )( )( ) D worksurface /4 21 XTSS1 3621F ( )( )( ) Side screen brackets ( pair ) postformed edge XTSM1P ( ) 264. squared edge XTSM1S ( ) 187. tapered edge XTSM1K ( ) 187. Crinion Open Table Example: XTSS13014F20 (W2801) 115 XT Crinion Open Table SS1 Side screen 30 Width 14 Height F Surface 20 Fabric grade W2801 Fabric 115 Frame finish Specifications 1. Tackable fabric surface is suffix F. 2. Select fabric surface finish code from list on page Crinion Open Table. 3. Specify frame finish. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Fabric is railroaded. Brackets are available in all paint finishes. 69 Side screens clamp to front and back edge of worksurface at any point (except at hinged access door). Specify side screen brackets separately. Specify 14 H screens fora43 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 50 horizon. Side screens align in height with center screens when worksurfaces are set at 28 3 /8 H.

71 Return screens Acrylic, Marker or veneer surface description application w d h pattern no. list Opal acrylic Trans. acrylic / Marker V1 V2 V3 Return screen to 43 H /4 14 XTRS ( )( )( ) $1,096. $1,156. $1,195. $1,320. $1, /4 14 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,096. 1,156. 1,210. 1,348. 1, /4 14 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,096. 1,156. 1,236. 1,382. 1, /4 14 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,096. 1,156. 1,251. 1,409. 1, /4 14 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,222. 1,279. 1,482. 1,616. 1,993. Return screen to 50 H /4 21 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,284. 1,373. 1,310. 1,477. 1, /4 21 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,284. 1,373. 1,333. 1,517. 1, /4 21 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,284. 1,373. 1,354. 1,554. 2, /4 21 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,284. 1,373. 1,377. 1,592. 2, /4 21 XTRS ( )( )( ) 1,442. 1,529. 1,614. 1,810. 2,349. Side screen brackets ( pair ) postformed edge XTSM1P ( ) 264. squared edge XTSM1S ( ) 187. Example: XTRS16014A O 118 XT Crinion Open Table RS1 Return screen 60 Width 14 Height A Acrylic O Opal 118 Frame finish Specifications 1. Specify surface A = Acrylic V = Veneer M = Marker 2. For Acrylic surface specify O = Opal T = Translucent Veneer surfaces may be any standard AutoStrada V1,V2 or V3 veneer. Specify veneer finish code from Crinion Open Table. 3. Specify frame finish. Frame is clear anodized aluminum (AA) or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Brackets are available in all paint finishes. Return screens span the depth of Crinion Open Table worksurfaces and the width of a 30,36 or 42 worksurface planned as perpendicular return. Specify 14 H screens for 42 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 49 horizon. Returns ( file tops or AutoStrada worksurfaces) must be at the same height as worksurface. Specify side brackets separately. Veneer grain direction is horizontal. 70

72 Return screens Tackable fabric surface description application w d h pattern no. list Return screen to 43 H /4 14 XTRS1 5414F ( )( )( ) $912. $933. $939. $960. $977. $977. $1, /4 14 XTRS1 6014F ( )( )( ) , /4 14 XTRS1 6614F ( )( )( ) ,017. 1,017. 1, /4 14 XTRS1 7214F ( )( )( ) ,009. 1,029. 1,029. 1, /4 14 XTRS1 7814F ( )( )( ) 1,086. 1,115. 1,122. 1,155. 1,177. 1,177. 1,235. Return screen to 50 H /4 21 XTRS1 5421F ( )( )( ) /4 21 XTRS1 6021F ( )( )( ) , /4 21 XTRS1 6621F ( )( )( ) ,011. 1,011. 1, /4 21 XTRS1 7221F ( )( )( ) ,001. 1,025. 1,025. 1, /4 21 XTRS1 7821F ( )( )( ) 1,105. 1,136. 1,142. 1,175. 1,201. 1,201. 1,257. Side screen brackets ( pair ) postformed edge XTSM1P ( ) 264. squared edge XTSM1S ( ) 187. Crinion Open Table Example: XTRS16014F20 (W2801) 611 XT Crinion Open Table RS1 Return screen 60 Width 14 Height F Surface 20 Fabric grade W2801 Fabric 611 Frame finish Specifications 1. Tackable fabric surface is suffix F. 2. Select fabric surface finish code from list on page Crinion Open Table. 3. Specify frame finish. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Fabric is railroaded. Brackets are available in all paint finishes. 71 Fabric return screens span the depth of Crinion Open Table worksurfaces and the width of a 30, 36 or 42 worksurface planned as perpendicular return. Specify 14 H screens for 43 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 50 horizon. Retuns must be at the same height as worksurface. Specify mounting brackets separately.

73 Dual end screens Acrylic, Marker or veneer surface description application w d h pattern no. list Opal acrylic Trans. acrylic / Marker V1 V2 V3 Dual end screens to 43 H 24 D dual /4 14 XTES ( )( )( ) $816. $844. $1,145. $1,265. $1, D dual /4 14 XTES ( )( )( ) 1,064. 1,125. 1,248. 1,391. 1, D dual /4 14 XTES ( )( )( ) 1,096. 1,156. 1,317. 1,479. 1,833. acrylic shown Dual end screens to 50 H 24 D dual /4 21 XTES ( )( )( ) ,018. 1,266. 1,423. 1, D dual /4 21 XTES ( )( )( ) 1,252. 1,340. 1,372. 1,559. 1, D dual /4 21 XTES ( )( )( ) 1,284. 1,488. 1,426. 1,643. 2,156. acrylic shown Replacement mast Kit acrylic center screen XTSM1C ( ) 106. slatwall center screen XTSM1SLAT ( ) 281. End screen brackets ( pair ) tapered edge worksurface XTSM1KK ( ) 187. Side screen brackets ( pair ) postformed edge XTSM1P ( ) 264. squared edge XTSM1S ( ) 187. Example: XTES16014A O AA XT Crinion Open Table ES1 End screen 60 Width 14 Height A Surface O Opal AA Frame finish Specifications 1. Specify surface A = Acrylic V = Veneer M = Marker 2. For Acrylic surface specify O = Opal T = Translucent Veneer surfaces may be any standard AutoStrada V1,V2 or V3 veneer. Specify veneer finish code from Crinion Open Table. 3. Specify frame finish. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Brackets are available in all paint finishes. Replacement mast kit for acrylic center screen is 812 Easy Grey or 111 Black. Dual end screens clamp to front edge of worksurface on either side of table. Specify 14 H screens fora42 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 49 horizon. Side screens align with center screens when worksurfaces are set at 28 3 /8 H. Specify end screen brackets separately for each sceen. Veneer grain direction is horizontal. 72

74 Dual end screens Tackable fabric surface description application w d h pattern no. list Dual end screens to 43 H 24 D dual /4 14 XTES1 4814F ( )( )( ) $839. $860. $863. $884. $899. $899. $ D dual /4 14 XTES1 6014F ( )( )( ) , D dual /4 14 XTES1 7214F ( )( )( ) ,008. 1,029. 1,029. 1,084. Dual end screens to 50 H 24 D dual /4 21 XTES1 4821F ( )( )( ) , D dual /4 21 XTES1 6021F ( )( )( ) ,010. 1,015. 1,039. 1,059. 1,059. 1, D dual /4 21 XTES1 7221F ( )( )( ) ,027. 1,031. 1,062. 1,087. 1,087. 1,136. Replacement mast Kit acrylic center screen XTSM1C ( ) 106. slatwall center screen XTSM1SLAT ( ) 281. End screen brackets ( pair ) tapered edge worksurface XTSM1KK ( ) 187. Side screen brackets ( pair ) postformed edge XTSM1P ( ) 264. squared edge XTSM1S ( ) 187. Crinion Open Table Example: XTES16014F20 (W2801) 112 XT Crinion Open Table ES1 End screen 60 Width 14 Height F Surface 20 Fabric grade W2801 Fabric 112 Frame finish Specifications 1. Tackable fabric surface is suffix F. 2. Select fabric surface finish code from list on page Crinion Open Table. 3. Specify frame finish. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Fabric is railroaded. Brackets are available in all paint finishes. Replacement mast kit is 812 Easy Grey or 111 Black. 73 Dual end screens clamp to front edge of worksurface on either side of table. Specify 14 H screens fora43 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 50 horizon. Side screens align with center screens when worksurfaces are set at 28 3 /8 H. Specify end screen brackets separately for each sceen.

75 Single sided end screen Acrylic, Marker or veneer surface description application w d h pattern no. list Opal acrylic Trans. acrylic / Marker V1 V2 V3 Single sided end screens to 43 H 24 D Single sided 24 1 /2 1 1 /4 14 XTES ( )( )( ) $658. $676. $991. $1,063. $1, D Single sided 30 1 /2 1 1 /4 14 XTES ( )( )( ) ,023. 1,104. 1, D Single sided 36 1 /2 1 1 /4 14 XTES ( )( )( ) ,050. 1,142. 1,311. acrylic shown Single sided end sceen to 50 H 24 D single sided 24 1 /2 1 1 /4 21 XTES ( )( )( ) ,061. 1,151. 1, D single sided 30 1 /2 1 1 /4 21 XTES ( )( )( ) ,095. 1,200. 1, D single sided 36 1 /2 1 1 /4 21 XTES ( )( )( ) ,126. 1,247. 1,487. acrylic shown Single sided end screen brackets ( set ) postformed edge XTSM1PC ( ) 188. square edge XTSM1SC ( ) 139. tapered edge XTSM1KC ( ) 139. Example: XTES13614A O 114 XT Crinion Open Table ES1 End screen 36 Width 14 Height A Surface O Opal 114 Frame finish Specifications 1. Specify surface A = Acrylic V = Veneer M = Marker 2. For Acrylic surface specify O = Opal T = Translucent Veneer surfaces may be any standard AutoStrada V1,V2 or V3 veneer. Specify veneer finish code from Crinion Open Table. 3. Specify frame finish. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any standard paint finish except 613 Silver. Brackets are available in all paint finishes. Single sided end screens clamp to front edge of worksurface and attach to top of channel. Specify 14 H screens for a 42 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 49 horizon. Side screens align with center screens when worksurfaces are set at 28 3 /8 H. Specify end screen brackets separately for each sceen. Veneer grain direction is horizontal. 74

76 Single sided end screen Tackable fabric surface description application w d h pattern no. list Single sided end screens to 43 H 24 D Single sided 24 1 /2 1 1 /4 14 XTES1 2414F ( )( )( ) $747. $755. $757. $769. $777. $777. $ D Single sided 30 1 /2 1 1 /4 14 XTES1 3014F ( )( )( ) D Single sided 36 1 /2 1 1 /4 14 XTES1 3614F ( )( )( ) Single sided end sceen to 50 H 24 D single sided 24 1 /2 1 1 /4 21 XTES1 2421F ( )( )( ) D single sided 30 1 /2 1 1 /4 21 XTES1 3021F ( )( )( ) D single sided 36 1 /2 1 1 /4 21 XTES1 3621F ( )( )( ) Single sided end screen brackets ( set ) postformed edge XTSM1PC ( ) 188. square edge XTSM1SC ( ) 139. tapered edge XTSM1KC ( ) 139. Crinion Open Table Example: XTES13614F20 (W2801) 111 XT Crinion Open Table ES1 End screen 36 Width 14 Height F Surface 20 Fabric grade W2801 Fabric 111 Frame finish Specifications 1. Tackable fabric surface is suffix F. 2. Select fabric surface finish code from list on page Crinion Open Table. 3. Specify frame finish. Frame is clear anodized aluminum or any paint finish except 613 Silver. Fabric is railroaded. Brackets are available in all paint finishes. 75 Single sided end screens clamp to front edge of worksurface and attach to top of channel. Specify 14 H screens for a 43 horizon. Specify 21 H screens for a 50 horizon. Side screens align with center screens when worksurfaces are set at 28 3 /8 H. Specify end screen brackets separately for each sceen.

77 Frameless glass Add up for Crinion Open Table description w d h pattern number clear tempered powder Frameless glass Add ups 48 1 /2 12 XAUA 1248G ( )( ) $559. $ /2 12 XAUA 1260G ( )( ) /2 12 XAUA 1272G ( )( ) Specifications Example: XAUA 1248G TEMP AA X Crinion Open Table AUA Frameless addup screen 48 Width 12 Height G Glass TEMP Finish AA Base finish Add up type: G Glass Glass add-ups are available with the following glass options: TEMP Clear tempered GL13 Powder Specify base finish: AA anodized aluminum and all standard painted finishes except 613 Silver. Frameless glass addups for Crinion Open Table match those available for the AutoStrada spine. Tempered glass in clear or powered finish is 1 /2 thick. Base frame is secured with bolts to top channel for frameless glass addups. Frameless addups cannot be mounted to standard top channel included with base assemblies. Base extrusion is clear anodized aluminum or any standard painted finish except Silver. 76

78 Morrison Network privacy screens mounting kit for Crinion Open Table description w d h pattern number list price Fabric screen mounting kit XTPS1MZKIT $128. Crinion Open Table Specifications Applications notes Example: XT PS1 MZ KIT XTPS1MZKIT Crinion Open Table Privacy Screen Fabric Kit Crinion Open Tables are designed to accept Morrison Network privacy screens with fabric screen mounting kit. Screens are tackable fabric, 3 /4 thick, in widths corresponding to Crinion worksurfaces 48,60 or 72 wide. Specify screens MZ1-B4815F, MZ1B6015F or MZ1B7215F. Specify one mounting kit for each screen. Fabric screen mounting kits include two uprights that fasten to the top channel at any point. Uprights slide into internal channels in screens. Fabric screens do not align in height with acrylic privacy screens. 77

79 General Specifications Panels and Parts All panels have a concealed perimeter frame 1 1 /2 x2. Panels 42 wide and wider, other than window panels, have additional interior bracing. Panel bases are 3 3 /8 or 6 3 /16 high with levellers at both ends. Snap-in panel side plates are provided with at least two lift-outs on each side of panels 30 to 48 wide; one lift-out on each side of panels 24 wide, unless no knockout option is requested (see Planning Guide for details). Acoustical panels can be specified with fabric on either side or fabric on one side and wood or laminate on the other. A laminated board septum is covered on both sides with acoustical fiberglass for fabric/fabric panels providing an NRC of.80 and STC of 22. Window panels utilize tempered 4mm thick glass. Panel-to panel connection is accomplished with a steel connector bar, which engages locking points on panel perimeter frames and is drawn tight by means of a screw mechanism located at the top of the bar. Each panel is supplied with one connector, which also serves as an anchor point for panel-hung support brackets. Panel-to-wall connection is accomplished with a PVC extrusion which connects two aluminum extrusions - one screwed to the wall, the other attached to the panel perimeter frame. Stacking panels are provided with a fastener feature which allows individual 15 and 30 H sections to be added or removed without disturbing the panel run. In all cases a leveller adjustable panel must first be specified with additional sections added on to provide height adjustment. A post is required at panel intersections, when a panel run changes direction or as in the case of the straight line post when it is required to make up an extra 2 1 /2 to match another panel run. Top trim utilizes a PVC extrusion for a press fit into the panel perimeter frame. End trim is screwed to a steel connector bar which locks it to the panel perimeter frame. All tiled panels are constructed using the same frame as monolithic panels and also use the same internal components. However, the insert structure has been altered to allow tiles 15 H to be independently applied to the panel, thus creating a tiled appearance. Tiled panels can be stacked on. Reff panels can be joined to existing System 6, Classic System 6, and Segmented panels with a conversion kit. Beltway electrical panel is a Reff panel altered to provide access to electrical and communication ports at a desk height level. Note: Line drawings in this price list are purely for quick product identification without any form of detail. One must not use the price list line drawings to satisfy production dimensions, shape or support options. Refer to Planning Guide for detailed product information. Wood and Laminate Components Tops are 1 3 /4 or 1 1 /4 thick. Undersides are pre-drilled with inserts and routed to accept pedestals and connecting hardware. Flush and cantilever top assemblies have 1 1 /16 thick endpanels, and 15 /16 thick backpanels. Recessed top assemblies have 1 1 /16 thick endpanels and a 15 /16 thick backpanel. Pedestals are supplied with metal channels on the top to attach the pedestal to the underside of a worksurface. Drawer boxes can be specified in both metal or wood with dovetailed joinery. Hinge doors use concealed, adjustable hinges. All components are veneered and finished on all sides unless otherwise specified. Edges are banded with 1 /8 PVC or 3 /32 solid wood. 1 3 /4 laminate tops are postformed front and back. 2 Deep solid waterfall edge optional. Locks All pedestals and cabinets with drawers are supplied with a ganglock mechanism in place. In addition, cabinets with drawers have a drawer interlock anti-tip device designed to prevent the opening of a second drawer when one is already open. Drawer fronts and door fronts are routed to receive the lock itself. Locks for drawers in pedestals and cabinets can be retro-fitted. Door locks are identical in shape to drawer locks, but these components are not pre-routed and therefore, locks cannot be retro-fitted. Reff lockcores must be specified separately. Reff lock mechanisms are black and feature a removable core for easy replacement. Levellers All endpanels, backpanels (except recessed), floor pedestals and cabinets have 1 1 /2 high levellers. Lighting Shelves and overhead cabinets have a bottom recess to house the task light. The task light can be easily retro-fitted. Power is conveyed to the task light fixture by a 9 long cable. The lower end of the cable can be plugged into a panel base receptacle. Grommets Grommets are optional (except where noted). Tops up to 48 wide have one grommet. Tops wider than 48 include two grommets. See Planning Guide for locations. All dimensions in this price list are for representative purposes only. For accurate build dimensions or factory drawings, please call Customer Services. The Reff electrical is listed for use in the Reff panel system under UL1286. Reff Floor to Ceiling is a modular, panel-based system. The ceiling channel should not be used as a support for the panel (see support section of specification guide). Because local building and electrical codes vary and may have special requirements for modular walls that touch, approach or are attached to the ceiling, customers and installers should have the specifications reviewed and approved by building inspectors and a qualified electrical contractor. To the extent local codes and practices dictate, Knoll is available to help with customized solutions. Orders with 50 or fewer locks required with no specific keying requests will be sent randomly keyed by the factory without warning. Finishing All Reff natural wood veneer and Techwood components are stained and sealed using a state of the art polyurethane finishing process. Polyur provides superior resistance to solvents, stains, abrasion and heat. Each component is coated and cured with ultraviolet light for a durable, lasting wood surface. Natural veneers are all hand selected to best showcase the beauty of natural grain and to Knoll s meticulous color and grain standards. Every effort is made to ensure that Knoll Reff veneers are the best that can be sourced in quality of color, consistency and size. Natural variations of wood are held in high regard and are not considered to be defects. Natural variations are not subject to warranty. The natural process of color change in real wood products is part of the unique character and beauty of this material. Knoll expects wood to patina over time and does not warranty color change. Techwood is a genuine real wood product, enhanced by technology to provide color and grain consistency. Techwood finishes are available in open and closed pore options. Open pore techwood finishes are not available on waterfall edge tops. Waterfall edge tops can be specified with closed pore V1 and V2 finishes only. FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) certified materials available upon request. 78

80 Reff Profiles finish options Wood Finishes: V1 Techwood Y316 Maple Y319 Cherry Y323 Medium Walnut Y326 Dark Mahogany Y327 Light Oak Y329 Medium Oak Y341 Wenge * Y342 Medium Teak * Y343 Dark Grey Oak * Y344 Espresso Y851 Black Oak Y811 Natural Y821 Blond Maple Y831 Light Cherry *Not available on Reff optional Edges and Waterfall Edge. V1 - Techwood Surface with matching synthethic edge: Options applicable for 1 1 /4 thick worksurfaces with standard flat edge only. S319 Cherry S316 Maple S323 Medium Walnut V2 Natural Veneers/Premium Techwod Veneers V312 Bronze Cherry V316 Maple V411 Light Walnut V415 Peacock Green Walnut V417 Old English Walnut V418 Smoked Walnut V433 Light Fawn Cherry V436 Medium Brown Cherry V439 Straight Anigre V440 Natural Hemlock (QC) Y871 Iced Sycamore (Open pore) Y841 Ebony (Open pore) Y861 Grigio (Open pore) (all above V2 s are flat cut) V421 Chalk Oak V423 Light Oak V425 Amber Oak V427 Brown Oak (all V2 Oak s are rift cut) V2 Natural Veneer with synthetic edge Options applicable for 1 1 /4 thick worksurfaces with standard flat edge only. R319 Medium Cherry R315 Light Cherry R316 Light Maple R323 Medium Walnut R415 Peacock Green Walnut R417 Old English Walnut R421 Chalk Oak R427 Brown Oak R312 Bronze Cherry V3 Premium Veneer V512 Figured Anigre V514 Makore V515 Figured Sycamore V517 Natural Sapele V518 Natural Chestnut (all above are quarter cut) Glass TEMP Clear Tempered (G1) Architectural Glass Options: (G2) GL13 Powder GL8 Wafer GL6 Block Matrix Back Painted Glass (G3) GL11 Back Painted Black GL14 Folkstone Grey GL15 Back Painted Medium Grey GL18 Back Painted White Colored Glass (G3) GL35 Grey GL85 Star Clear Locks Black and Silver Laminate Matching edge band unless noted otherwise 111 Jet Black 114 Folkstone Grey 115 Medium Grey 117 Soft Grey 118 Bright White 119 Pumice 121 Micro Grey with 114 Folkstone grey edge band 122 Brushed Sand with 119 Pumice edge band 123 Brushed Grey with 128 Fog edge band 124 Medium Chery * 125 Natural Maple * 126 Natural Cherry * 127 Walnut * 128 Fog 129 Micro Sand with 119 Pumice edge band *Woodgrain Laminate. Not available on all components. Paint Upcharge as applicable for paint class noted on applicable product pages P1 111 Jet Black 112 Brown 113 Dark Grey 114 Folkstone Grey 115 Medium Grey 116 Sandstone 117 Soft Grey P2 611 Beige Mist Metallic 612 Medium Metallic Grey P3 118 Bright White 613 Silver Plated PD PT PN PU Polish Chrome Brushed Pewter Black Nickel Satin Nickel Anodized AN Anodized Black AP Anodized Polished AU Anodized Satin AA Anodized Aluminum See matrix next page for finishes applicable by component Forbo 851 Biscuit 852 Sky Blue 853 Stone 854 Cinnamon 855 Heather Blue Solid Surface AW Artic White Mixed Finishes: (where applicable for work surfaces only) To order mixed finishes, enter four digit finish code as follows: Use 2 digit prefix to indicate surface finish (laminate) 11 Jet Black 14 Folkstone Grey 17 Soft Grey 18 Bright White 19 Pumice 21 Micro Grey 22 Brushed Sand 23 Brushed Grey 28 Fog 29 Micro Sand Use 2 digit suffix to indicate edge finish (wood) 12 for V for V316, Y316 Y9 for Y319 Y3 for Y for Y for Y for Y for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for V for Y851 Y1 for Y for Y for Y344 Example: For a Micro Grey laminate surface with Bronzed Cherry edge, enter finish code 2112 Reff Profiles For a Jet Black laminate surface with Light Maple edge, enter finish code

81 Reff Profiles finish options Fabric Options For Panels Grade 10 Broadcloth II (1619) Foundation (W351) Growth Spurt (W692) Symbolic Detail (W693) Tailor Made II (W1610/6) Versatility (W432) Grade 20 Bauhaus Block (W296A) Circle Line (W1146) Clarity (W281) Criss Cross (W305) Labyrinth (W352) ø Logic (W1318) Photon (W1293) Reflect (W884) ø Resolution (W280) Weave Three (W298) Grade 30 Basket Draft (W249) Flow (W565) Harmony (W232) Interknit (W1090) Match Point (W1145) Micro (W465)* Progression (W403) Relay (W1020) Grade 40 Clarkson (W1218) Ornament (W1078) Palladium (W1030) Grade 45 Dristi (K872)* ø *with backing only Monolithic panels and tackboards only ø May not be available in all colors. Non-merchandized available for purchase but samples not available. The following textiles are approved for use on Reff panels. Consult Knoll representative for pricing: Grade 50 Knoll Hopsack (K1206) Ricochet (W498) Grade 55 Knoll Felt (K1207) Transition (W816) Customers Own Material Prices for panels and tackboards that are to be manufactured with a customer supplied fabric will follow Grade 10 panel pricing. COM fabrics are subject to a testing charge prior to acceptance for use on Reff panels. Panels bearing COM fabrics are subject to extended leadtimes. It is the responsibility of the customer s purchasing agent to ensure COM fabric is supplied for testing and manufacturing. Delays in receiving COM fabric for manufacturing will result in rescheduled delivery dates. When specifying panel/fabrics use the following format to denote location on a tiled panel. Side 1 Side 2 1E Top of Panel 2E 1D 2D 1C 2C 1B 2B 1A Bottom of Panel 2A (Side 1 is always the inside of the workstation.) Panels with beltway one side: assume the beltway is on SIDE 1 of the panel. 80

82 Reff Profiles Master Features Panel Trim Profiles Worksurface Profiles 1 1 /2,1 1 /4 and 1 Thick Standard Flat (Option A) 1 1 /4 Thick Waterfall Square (Option B) 1 1 /4 Thick Cascade 1 Thick Sliding Table Bullnose (Option C) Reff Profiles Extruded Aluminum (Option E) NOTE: See page 0 for 7 Optional Edges which are also available. 81

83 Optional edge details Reff Profiles System incorporates optional worksurface edge details. Wood edges are crafted from select hardwoods and are finished with Knoll s industry leading polyurethane Reff Profiles Finish. Optional for worksurface tops listed on pages 0 through 0. It is not necessary to plan separately for edges that mate ; this feature is engineered into appropriate products when used as intended. Edge detail to be specified by one of the following codes: A - Alpha B - Beta C - Chi D - Delta E - Epsilon F - Phi G - Gamma 82

84 Conference 1 1 /4 Square and rectangular description w d pattern no. L M/V1 V2 V3 Rectangular top 1 piece RRA7230-( ) $597. $663. $762. $1, RRA7236-( ) , RRA8430-( ) , RRA8436-( ) , RRA8442-( ) 1,050. 1,165. 1,336. 1, RRA9630-( ) , RRA9636-( ) ,044. 1, RRA9642-( ) 1,205. 1,334. 1,535. 2, RRA9648-( ) 1,281. 1,422. 1,634. 2,206. Rectangular top 2 piece RRA12036-( ) 1,313. 1,456. 1,675. 2, RRA12042-( ) 1,811. 2,008. 2,310. 3, RRA12048-( ) 1,968. 2,184. 2,510. 3, RRA14442-( ) 2,035. 2,256. 2,595. 3, RRA14448-( ) 2,179. 2,419. 2,782. 3,755. Rectangular top 3 piece RRA16842-( ) 2,667. 2,957. 3,404. 4, RRA16848-( ) 2,898. 3,214. 3,696. 4, RRA19242-( ) 2,892. 3,207. 3,685. 4, RRA19248-( ) 3,114. 3,451. 3,966. 5,353. Square tops * 60 RRA6060-( ) 1,224. 1,356. 1,563. 2,107. * 72 RRA7272-( ) 1,442. 1,600. 1,840. 2, RRA3636-( ) RRA4242-( ) , RRA4848-( ) ,001. 1,349. Reff Profiles Specification Information Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. All tops on this page are without grommets or drillings. The intended use of these products is to provide conference room table options. Top to top brackets included. Tops have no radius on edges that adjoin. See table base matrix in Planning Guide, pages 140 and 141. Example: RRAG72302 R Reff R Rectangular A 1 1 /4 thick wide deep 2 V2 finish V319 Medium cherry To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Top thickness 2. Width 3. Depth 4. Finish type 5. Finish 1. Thickness options: A=1 1 /4 4. Finish type: L = Laminate M = Wood/laminate mixed 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 *Square tops in two pieces. Actual widths of worksurface are 1 /16 less than nominal dimension. Actual depth is 1 /8 less than nominal dimension. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Worksurface stiffeners are recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. 83

85 Conference 1 1 /4 Round and racetrack description w d pattern no. L, Option A M/V! V2 V3 Racetrack top 1 piece RTA7230-( ) $1,131. $1,254. $1,438. $1, RTA8430-( ) 1,258. 1,395. 1,604. 2, RTA9630-( ) 1,398. 1,552. 1,786. 2, RTA7236-( ) 1,290. 1,429. 1,642. 2, RTA8436-( ) 1,448. 1,608. 1,847. 2, RTA9636-( ) 1,607. 1,782. 2,051. 2, RTA8442-( ) 1,761. 1,955. 2,248. 3, RTA9642-( ) 1,975. 2,190. 2,516. 3, RTA9648-( ) 2,166. 2,398. 2,759. 3,723. Racetrack top 2 piece RTA12036-( ) 2,074. 2,302. 2,649. 3, RTA12042-( ) 2,240. 2,481. 2,856. 3, RTA14442-( ) 2,470. 2,737. 3,148. 4, RTA12048-( ) 2,380. 2,639. 3,036. 4, RTA14448-( ) 2,531. 2,808. 3,226. 4,354. Racetrack top 3 piece RTA16842-( ) 3,096. 3,431. 3,947. 5, RTA19242-( ) 3,325. 3,686. 4,242. 5, RTA16848-( ) 3,314. 3,671. 4,221. 5, RTA19248-( ) 3,462. 3,840. 4,414. 5,959. Round tops 36 RTA3636-( ) , RTA4242-( ) , RTA4848-( ) 1,215. 1,345. 1,546. 2,088. * 60 RTA6060-( ) 1,902. 2,109. 2,426. 3,275. * 72 RTA7272-( ) 2,353. 2,608. 3,004. 4,056. Specification Information Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Top to top brackets included with multiple piece conference tops only. See table base matrix in Planning Guide pages 140 and 141. Tops have no radius on edges that adjoin. Example: RTA72302 R Reff R Round A 1 1 /4 thick wide deep 2 V2 finish V319 Medium cherry To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Top thickness 2. Width 3. Depth 4. Finish type 5. Finish 1. Thickness options: A=1 1 /4 4. Finish type: L = Laminate M = Wood/laminate mixed 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 *Round tops in two pieces. All tops on this page are without grommets or drillings. The intended use of these products is to provide conference room table options. Actual widths of worksurface are 1 /16 less than nominal dimension. Actual depth is 1 /8 less than nominal dimension. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Worksurface stiffeners are recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. 84

86 Optional edge 1 1 /4 curvilinear corner front edge only description width1 w right pattern no. M/V1 V2 V3 Curved corner work tops with Profile edge on front only, left return 24, right return 20 Curved corner work tops with Profile edge on front only, return depth left and right RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) $903. $1,037. $1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) ,093. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,011. 1,159. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) ,093. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,011. 1,159. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,100. 1,263. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,011. 1,159. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,100. 1,263. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,155. 1,329. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) ,126. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,031. 1,183. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,086. 1,248. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,031. 1,183. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,086. 1,248. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,178. 1,355. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,086. 1,248. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,178. 1,355. 1, RCA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)F ( )(1/2/3) 1,233. 1,416. 1,913. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RCAGF R Reff C Corner top A 1 1 /4 thick G Gamma F Edge Front only wide wide 1 20 deep 1 20 deep F Flush grommet 2 V2 finish V319 Medium cherry 111 Jet Black (grommet) To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Edge profile 2. Left hand width 3. Right hand width 4. Return left hand depth 5. Return right hand depth 6. Grommet option 7. Top finish type 8. Top finish 9. Grommet finish 1. Edge profile options: A = Alpha B = Beta C = Chi D = Delta E = Epsilon F = Phi G = Gamma 6. Grommet options: N = No grommet F = Flush front grommet location 7. Finish type: 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Products on this page do not accept the following finishes: Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak Knoll assumes no responsibility for special grommet locations which interfere with support or other hardware. All requests for special grommet locations must be approved through custom product development. Products on this page are shipped without hardware which must be ordered separately from the support components section. Worksurface stiffeners recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. 85

87 Optional edge 1 1 /4 round and racetrack conference tops description w d pattern no. V1 V2 V3 Racetrack top - 1 piece RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)7230-(1/2/3) $1,439. $1,655. $2, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)7236-(1/2/3) 1,643. 1,886. 2, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)8430-(1/2/3) 1,602. 1,846. 2, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)8436-(1/2/3) 1,849. 2,121. 2, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)8442-(1/2/3) 2,248. 2,586. 3, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)9630-(1/2/3) 1,786. 2,054. 2, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)9636-(1/2/3) 2,052. 2,356. 3, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)9642-(1/2/3) 2,516. 2,894. 3,907. Racetrack top - 2 piece Profile edge on all sides except on parting lines Racetrack top - 3 piece Profile edge on all sides except on parting lines RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)12036-(1/2/3) 2,649. 3,045. 4, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)12042-(1/2/3) 2,856. 3,282. 4, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)12048-(1/2/3) 3,036. 3,489. 4, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)14442-(1/2/3) 3,147. 3,620. 4, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)14448-(1/2/3) 3,227. 3,709. 5, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)16842-(1/2/3) 3,946. 4,539. 6, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)16848-(1/2/3) 4,221. 4,854. 6, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)19242-(1/2/3) 4,242. 4,877. 6, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)19248-(1/2/3) 4,414. 5,077. 6,851. Round tops Profile edge on all sides except on parting lines. * 60 RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)6060-(1/2/3) 2,426. 2,790. 3,764. * 72 RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)7272-(1/2/3) 3,002. 3,453. 4, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)3636-(1/2/3) , RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)4242-(1/2/3) ,079. 1, RTA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)4848-(1/2/3) 1,546. 1,778. 2,400. Specification Information Example: RTAG72302 R Reff T Racetrack top A 1 1 /4 thick G Gamma wide deep 2 V2 finish V319 Medium cherry To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Edge profile 2. Width 3. Depth 4. Finish type 5. Finish 1. Edge profile options: A = Alpha B = Beta C = Chi D = Delta E = Epsilon F = Phi G = Gamma 4. Finish type: 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 *Round tops in two pieces. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Products on this page do not accept the following finishes: Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak Knoll assumes no responsibility for special grommet locations which interfere with support or other hardware. All requests for special grommet locations must be approved through custom product development. Products on this page are shipped without hardware which must be ordered separately from the support components section. Worksurface stiffeners are recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. 86

88 Optional edge 1 1 /4 square and rectangular conference tops description w d pattern no. V1 V2 V3 Rectangular top - 1 piece RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)7230-(1/2/3) $762. $875. $1, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)7236-(1/2/3) , RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)8430-(1/2/3) , RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)8436-(1/2/3) ,038. 1, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)8442-(1/2/3) 1,337. 1,537. 2, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)9630-(1/2/3) ,086. 1, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)9636-(1/2/3) 1,044. 1,201. 1, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)9642-(1/2/3) 1,535. 1,764. 2,381. Rectangular top - 2 piece Profile edge on all sides except on parting lines Rectangular top - 3 piece Profile edge on all sides except on parting lines RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)12036-(1/2/3) 1,675. 1,926. 2, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)12042-(1/2/3) 2,310. 2,656. 3, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)12048-(1/2/3) 2,510. 2,887. 3, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)14442-(1/2/3) 2,593. 2,987. 4, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)14448-(1/2/3) 2,782. 3,197. 4, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)16842-(1/2/3) 3,403. 3,914. 5, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)16848-(1/2/3) 3,695. 4,252. 5, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)19242-(1/2/3) 3,685. 4,241. 5, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)19248-(1/2/3) 3,968. 4,563. 6,159. Square top Profile edge on all sides except on parting lines * 60 RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)6060-(1/2/3) 1,561. 1,794. 2,424. * 72 RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)7272-(1/2/3) 1,840. 2,115. 2, RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)3636-(1/2/3) RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)4242-(1/2/3) , RRA(A/B/C/D/E/F/G)4848-(1/2/3) 1,002. 1,150. 1,551. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RRAG72302 R Reff R Conference Room top A 1 1 /4 thick G Gamma wide deep 2 V2 finish V319 Medium cherry To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Edge option 2. Width 3. Depth 4. Finish type 5. Finish 1. Edge profile options: A = Alpha B = Beta C = Chi D = Delta E = Epsilon F = Phi G = Gamma 4. Finish type: 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 * Square tops in two pieces. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Products on this page do not accept the following finishes: Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak Knoll assumes no responsibility for special grommet locations which interfere with support or other hardware. All requests for special grommet locations must be approved through custom product development. Products on this page are shipped without hardware which must be ordered separately from the support components section. Worksurface stiffeners are recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. 87

89 Waterfall Edge 1 1 /4 2 Waterfall edge conference room tops round and racetrack description w d pattern no. V1 V2 V3 Racetrack top - one piece RTAW7230-(1/2/3) $4,114. $4,729. $6, RTAW7236-(1/2/3) 4,689. 5,390. 7, RTAW8430-(1/2/3) 4,579. 5,265. 7, RTAW8436-(1/2/3) 5,271. 6,062. 8, RTAW8442-(1/2/3) 6,417. 7,382. 9, RTAW9630-(1/2/3) 5,098. 5,860. 7, RTAW9636-(1/2/3) 5,848. 6,729. 9, RTAW9642-(1/2/3) 7,185. 8, ,151. Racetrack top - two piece, Waterfall edge on all sides except on parting lines RTAW12036-(1/2/3) 7,555. 8, , RTAW12042-(1/2/3) 8,147. 9, , RTAW14442-(1/2/3) 8, , ,945. Racetrack top - three piece, Waterfall edge on all sides except on parting lines RTAW16842-(1/2/3) 11, , , RTAW19242-(1/2/3) 12, , ,791. RTAW16842-(1/2) comes with 2-60 pieces/1-48 center RTAW19242-(1/2) comes with 2-72 pieces/1-48 center Round tops, Waterfall edge on all sides except on parting lines * 60 RTAW6060-(1/2/3) 6,924. 7, ,744. * 72 RTAW7272-(1/2/3) 8,569. 9, , RTAW3636-(1/2/3) 2,315. 3,104. 4, RTAW4242-(1/2/3) 2,681. 3,597. 4,856. Specification Information Example: RTAW72302 R Reff T Rounded top A 1 1 /4 thick W Waterfall all sides wide deep 2 V2 finish V319 Medium cherry To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Top thickness 2. Finish type 3. Finish 1. Thickness option: A=1 1 /4 2. Finish type: 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 *Round tops in two pieces. Top to top brackets included. See table base matrix in Planning Guide for base supports recommended. Worksurface stiffeners are recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. Tops have no radius on edges that adjoin. All tops on this page are without grommets or drillings. The intended use of these products is to provide conference room table options. Actual widths of worksurface are 1 /16 less than nominal dimension. Actual depth is 1 /8 less than nominal dimension. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Products on this page do not accept the following finishes: Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak Waterfall tops cannot be specified with semi-open pore finish. 88

90 Waterfall Edge 1 1 /4 2 Waterfall edge conference room tops square and rectangular description w d pattern no. V1 V2 V3 Rectangular top - one piece RRAW7230-(1/2/3) $2,172. $2,500. $3, RRAW7236-(1/2/3) 2,360. 2,715. 3, RRAW8430-(1/2/3) 2,403. 2,765. 3, RRAW8436-(1/2/3) 2,583. 2,966. 4, RRAW8442-(1/2/3) 3,817. 4,387. 5, RRAW9630-(1/2/3) 2,696. 3,102. 4, RRAW9636-(1/2/3) 2,981. 3,426. 4, RRAW9642-(1/2/3) 4,377. 5,034. 6,795. Rectangular top - two piece, Waterfall edge on all sides except on parting lines RRAW12036-(1/2/3) 4,775. 5,497. 7, RRAW12042-(1/2/3) 6,591. 7, , RRAW14442-(1/2/3) 7,404. 8, ,495. Rectangular top - three piece, Waterfall edge on all sides except on parting lines RRAW16842-(1/2/3) 9, , , RRAW19242-(1/2/3) 10, , ,331. RRAW16842-(1/2) comes with 2-60 pieces/1-48 center RRAW19242-(1/2) comes with 2-72 pieces /1-48 center Square top - one piece 36 RRAW3636-(1/2/3) 1,680. 2,250. 3, RRAW4242-(1/2/3) 2,172. 2,914. 3,934. Reff Profiles Square top - two piece, Waterfall edge not on parting lines 60 RRAW6060-(1/2/3) 4,449. 5,114. 6, RRAW7272-(1/2/3) 5,254. 6,044. 8,157. Specification Information Example: RRAW72302 R Reff R Rectangular A 1 1 /4 thick W Waterfall all sides wide deep 2 V2 finish V319 Medium cherry To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Top thickness 2. Finish type 3. Finish 1. Thickness option: A=1 1 /4 2. Finish type: 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Products on this page do not accept the following finishes: Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak All tops on this page are without grommets or drillings. The intended use of these products is to provide conference room table options. Top to top brackets included. Tops have no radius on edges that adjoin. See table base matrix in Planning Guide for base supports recommended. Worksurface stiffeners are recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. Waterfall tops cannot be specified with semi-open pore finish. Actual widths of worksurface are 1 /16 less than nominal dimension. Actual depth is 1 /8 less than nominal dimension. 89

91 Tables, 1 1 /2 Rectangle with Open Frame Leg 24,30 and 36 deep /2 High description th d w pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Table Top Rectangle 24 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg 1 1 / RTRDOF60241( )( ) $1,750. $1,933. $2,001. $2, / RTRDOF66241( )( ) 1,762. 1,952. 2,027. 2, / RTRDOF72241( )( ) 1,775. 1,967. 2,049. 2, / RTRDOF78241( )( ) 1,793. 2,009. 2,095. 2, / RTRDOF84241( )( ) 1,805. 2,048. 2,138. 2,475. Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg 1 1 / RTRDOF60301( )( ) 1,845. 2,003. 2,085. 2, / RTRDOF66301( )( ) 1,858. 2,026. 2,115. 2, / RTRDOF72301( )( ) 1,875. 2,042. 2,157. 2, / RTRDOF78301( )( ) 1,895. 2,092. 2,195. 2, / RTRDOF84301( )( ) 1,909. 2,143. 2,253. 2,644. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg 1 1 / RTRDOF60361( )( ) 1,871. 2,055. 2,150. 2, / RTRDOF66361( )( ) 1,887. 2,083. 2,187. 2, / RTRDOF72361( )( ) 1,906. 2,122. 2,234. 2, / RTRDOF78361( )( ) 1,929. 2,155. 2,277. 2, / RTRDOF84361( )( ) 1,945. 2,201. 2,330. 2,773. Specification Information Example: RTSDRL42421 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TR Table Rectangular D 1 1 /2 OF Open Frame Leg 60 Width 30 Depth /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Open Frame Leg finish Painted and Anodized Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. 1 1 /2 top will come with appropriate stiffener support. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. 90

92 Tables, 1 1 /2 Rectangle with Open Frame Leg 24,30 and 36 deep /8 High description th d w pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Table Top Rectangle 24 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg 1 1 / RTRDOF60242( )( ) $1,750. $1,933. $2,001. $2, / RTRDOF66242( )( ) 1,762. 1,952. 2,027. 2, / RTRDOF72242( )( ) 1,775. 1,967. 2,049. 2, / RTRDOF78242( )( ) 1,793. 2,009. 2,095. 2, / RTRDOF84242( )( ) 1,805. 2,048. 2,138. 2,475. Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg 1 1 / RTRDOF60302( )( ) 1,845. 2,003. 2,085. 2, / RTRDOF66302( )( ) 1,858. 2,026. 2,115. 2, / RTRDOF72302( )( ) 1,875. 2,042. 2,157. 2, / RTRDOF78302( )( ) 1,895. 2,092. 2,195. 2, / RTRDOF84302( )( ) 1,909. 2,143. 2,253. 2,644. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg 1 1 / RTRDOF60362( )( ) 1,871. 2,055. 2,150. 2, / RTRDOF66362( )( ) 1,887. 2,083. 2,187. 2, / RTRDOF72362( )( ) 1,906. 2,122. 2,234. 2, / RTRDOF78362( )( ) 1,929. 2,155. 2,277. 2, / RTRDOF84362( )( ) 1,945. 2,201. 2,330. 2,773. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RTSDRL42421 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TR Table Rectangular D 1 1 /2 OF Open Frame Leg 60 Width 30 Depth /8 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Open Frame Leg finish Painted and Anodized Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. 1 1 /2 top will come with appropriate stiffener support. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. 91

93 Tables, 1 1 /2 Open Frame Leg Infill Options /2 High Infills for Tables only description h d pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 glass Inside Infill Options for Open Frame Legs 26 1 /2 h RIPI201( ) $296. $384. $442. $ RIPI241( ) RIPI301( ) RIPI361( ) Outside Infill Options for Open Frame Legs 26 1 /2 h RIPO201( ) RIPO241( ) RIPO301( ) RIPO361( ) Outside Glass Infill Options for Open Frame Legs 26 1 /2 h RIPOG201( ) RIPOG241( ) RIPOG301( ) 1, RIPOG361( ) 1,171. Specification Information Example: RIPPEI202 R Reff Profiles IP Infill Panel PE Peninsula End I Inside 20 Width /8 h: Desk Height () Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish: L, V1,V2,V3, Glass I=Inside O=Outside OG=Outside Glass Glass options: GL11, GL14, GL15, GL18 Both Inside and Outside infill panels are required and must be ordered separately. Infills; fill entire opening of open frame legs. Infills connect to each other. Can be removed without any damage to the frame legs. Glass Option is only available for outside infill. Note: the infills for the open frame leg Peninsula and Tables are not interchangeable. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Inside infill options are wood or laminate. 92

94 Tables, 1 1 /2 Open Frame Leg Infill Options /8 High Infills for Tables only description h d pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 glass Inside Infill Options for Open Frame Legs 28 3 /8 h RIPI202( ) $296. $384. $442. $ RIPI242( ) RIPI302( ) RIPI362( ) Outside Infill Options for Open Frame Legs 28 3 /8 h RIPO202( ) RIPO242( ) RIPO302( ) RIPO362( ) Outside Glass Infill Options for Open Frame Legs 28 3 /8 h RIPOG202( ) RIPOG242( ) RIPOG302( ) 1, RIPOG362( ) 1,171. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RIPPEI202 R Reff Profiles IP Infill Panel PE Peninsula End I Inside 20 Width /8 h: Desk Height () Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish: L, V1,V2,V3, Glass I=Inside O=Outside OG=Outside Glass Glass options: GL11, GL14, GL15, GL18 Both Inside and Outside infill panels are required and must be ordered separately. Infills; fill entire opening of open frame legs. Infills connect to each other. Can be removed without any damage to the frame legs. Glass Option is only available for outside infill. Note: the infills for the open frame leg Peninsula and Tables are not interchangeable. Inside infill options are wood or laminate. 93

95 Tables, 1 1 /2 Rectangle with L-Leg 30 and 36 deep description d w th pattern no. L M/V1 V2 V3 Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg /2 RTRDL48301( )( ) $1,484. $1,607. $1,676. $1, /2 RTRDL60301( )( ) 1,556. 1,685. 1,768. 2, /2 RTRDL72301( )( ) 1,603. 1,736. 1,834. 2,217. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg /2 RTRDL72361( )( ) 1,652. 1,789. 1,903. 2,345. Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg /2 RTRDL48302( )( ) 1,484. 1,607. 1,676. 1, /2 RTRDL60302( )( ) 1,556. 1,685. 1,768. 2, /2 RTRDL72302( )( ) 1,603. 1,736. 1,834. 2,217. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg /2 RTRDL72362( )( ) 1,652. 1,789. 1,903. 2,345. Specification Information Example: RTRDL48301 ( )( ) R Reff TR Table Rectangular D 1 1 /2 L L-Leg 48 Width 30 Depth /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Leg finish Painted / Anodized Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. Worksurface stiffeners, recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. 94

96 Tables, 1 1 /2 Rectangle with Reverse L-Leg 30 and 36 deep description d w th pattern no. L M/V1 V2 V3 Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg /2 RTRDRL48301( )( )( )( ) $1,484. $1,607. $1,676. $1, /2 RTRDRL60301( )( )( )( ) 1,556. 1,685. 1,768. 2, /2 RTRDRL72301( )( )( )( ) 1,603. 1,736. 1,834. 2,217. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg /2 RTRDRL72361( )( )( )( ) 1,652. 1,789. 1,903. 2,345. Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg /2 RTRDRL48302( )( )( )( ) 1,484. 1,607. 1,676. 1, /2 RTRDRL60302( )( )( )( ) 1,556. 1,685. 1,768. 2, /2 RTRDRL72302( )( )( )( ) 1,603. 1,736. 1,833. 2,217. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg /2 RTRDRL72362( )( )( )( ) 1,652. 1,789. 1,903. 2,345. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RTRDRL48301 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TR Table Rectangular D 1 1 /2 RL Reverse L-Leg 48 Width 30 Depth /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Leg finish Painted / Anodized Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. Worksurface stiffeners, recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. 95

97 Tables, 1 1 /2 Rectangle with Soft Rectangular Leg 30 and 36 deep description depth width thickness pattern number L M/V1 V2 V3 Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg /2 RTRDS48301( )( )( )( ) $1,377. $1,491. $1,561. $1, /2 RTRDS60301( )( )( )( ) 1,450. 1,570. 1,652. 1, /2 RTRDS72301( )( )( )( ) 1,497. 1,620. 1,718. 2,103. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 26 1 /2 height leg /2 RTRDS72361( )( )( )( ) 1,546. 1,674. 1,788. 2,230. Table Top Rectangle 30 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg /2 RTRDS48302( )( )( )( ) 1,377. 1,491. 1,561. 1, /2 RTRDS60302( )( )( )( ) 1,450. 1,570. 1,652. 1, /2 RTRDS72302( )( )( )( ) 1,497. 1,620. 1,718. 2,103. Table Top Rectangle 36 Deep with 28 3 /8 height leg /2 RTRDS72362( )( )( )( ) 1,546. 1,674. 1,788. 2,230. Specification Information Example: RTRDS48301 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TR Table Rectangular D 1 1 /2 S Soft Rectangular Leg 48 Width 30 Depth /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Leg finish Painted / Anodized Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. Worksurface stiffeners, recommended to provide additional support for open spans greater than 48 w. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. 96

98 Tables, 1 1 /2 Square with L-Leg 42 and 48 deep description w d th pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Table Top Square with 26 1 /2 height legs /2 RTSDL42421( )( )( )( ) $1,520. $1,649. $1,731. $2, /2 RTSDL48481( )( )( )( ) 1,584. 1,719. 1,823. 2,216. Table Top Square with 28 3 /8 height legs /2 RTSDL42422( )( )( )( ) 1,520. 1,649. 1,731. 2, /2 RTSDL48482( )( )( )( ) 1,584. 1,719. 1,823. 2,216. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RTSDL42421 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TS Table Square D 1 1 /2 L L-Leg 42 Width 42 Depth /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Leg finish Painted / Anodized Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. 97

99 Tables, 1 1 /2 Square with Reverse L-Leg 42 and 48 deep description th d w pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Table Top Square with 26 1 /2 height legs 1 1 / RTSDRL42421( )( )( )( ) $1,520. $1,649. $1,731. $2, / RTSDRL48481( )( )( )( ) 1,584. 1,719. 1,823. 2,216. Table Top Square with 28 3 /8 height legs 1 1 / RTSDRL42422( )( )( )( ) 1,520. 1,649. 1,731. 2, / RTSDRL48482( )( )( )( ) 1,584. 1,719. 1,823. 2,216. Specification Information Example: RTSDRL42421 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TS Table Square D 1 1 /2 RL Reverse L-Leg 42 Width 42 Depth /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Leg finish Painted / Anodized Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. 98

100 Tables, 1 1 /2 Square with Soft Rectangular Leg 42 and 48 deep description th d w pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Table Top Square with 26 1 /2 height legs 1 1 / RTSDS42421( )( )( )( ) $1,557. $1,690. $1,773. $2, / RTSDS48481( )( )( )( ) 1,622. 1,760. 1,863. 2,257. Table Top Square with 28 3 /8 height legs 1 1 / RTSDS42422( )( )( )( ) 1,557. 1,690. 1,773. 2, / RTSDS48482( )( )( )( ) 1,662. 1,760. 1,863. 2,257. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RTSDS42421 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TS Table Square D 1 1 /2 S Soft Rectangular-Leg 42 Width 42 Depth /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Leg finish Painted / Anodized Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. 99

101 Tables, 1 1 /2 Round with Column Leg 36,42 and 48 diameter description th dia. pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Table Top Round with 26 1 /2 height legs 1 1 /2 36 RTNDC361( )( )( )( ) $2,498. $2,710. $2,772. $2, /2 42 RTNDC421( )( )( )( ) 2,560. 2,777. 2,859. 3, /2 48 RTNDC481( )( )( )( ) 2,622. 2,845. 2,947. 3,307. Table Top Round with 28 3 /8 height legs 1 1 /2 36 RTNDC362( )( )( )( ) 2,498. 2,710. 2,772. 2, /2 42 RTNDC422( )( )( )( ) 2,560. 2,777. 2,859. 3, /2 48 RTNDC482( )( )( )( ) 2,622. 2,845. 2,947. 3,307. Specification Information Example: RTNDC361 ( )( )( )( ) R Reff TN Table Round D 1 1 /2 C Column Leg 36 Diameter /2 height leg V316 Finish 111 Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish L, V1, V2, V3 2. Leg finish Painted / Plated Assembly required, ships knock down. Modesty sold separately. Grommets are NOT optional for these tables. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. 100

102 Tables, 1 Sliding, Laminate description d w th pattern no. L Round Table with 26 1 /2 height legs 36 1 RSTRLE361( )( ) $3, RSTRLE421( )( ) 3,065. Round Table with 28 3 /8 height legs 36 1 RSTRLE362( )( ) 3, RSTRLE422( )( ) 3,123. Soft Square Table with 26 1 /2 height legs 36 1 RSTSLE361( )( ) 2, RSTSLE421( )( ) 3,043. Soft Square Table with 28 3 /8 height legs 36 1 RSTSLE362( )( ) 3, RSTSLE422( )( ) 3,101. Soft Rectangle Table with 26 1 /2 height legs RSTTLE30481( )( ) 2, RSTTLE36541( )( ) 2,881. Soft Rectangle Table with 28 3 /8 height legs RSTTLE30482( )( ) 2, RSTTLE36542( )( ) 2,939. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RSTRLE361 ( )( ) R Reff ST Sliding Table R Round L Laminate surface E 1 thick diameter /2 height leg 114 Finish 118T Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish: Laminate only 2. Leg Textured finish: 111T, 115T, 118T Assembly required. Ships knocked down. Grommets are not an option for these tables. Column and base are color matched Column = smooth Base = textured Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. 101

103 Tables, 1 Sliding, Wood description d w th pattern no. V1 V2 V3 Round Table with 26 1 /2 height legs 36 1 RSTRWE361( )( ) $3,261. $3,312. $3, RSTRWE421( )( ) 3,326. 3,394. 3,712. Round Table with 28 3 /8 height legs 36 1 RSTRWE362( )( ) 3,324. 3,374. 3, RSTRWE422( )( ) 3,389. 3,457. 3,775. Soft Square Table with 26 1 /2 height legs 36 1 RSTSWE361( )( ) 3,232. 3,283. 3, RSTSWE421( )( ) 3,302. 3,368. 3,712. Soft Square Table with 28 3 /8 height legs 36 1 RSTSWE362( )( ) 3,296. 3,347. 3, RSTSWE422( )( ) 3,365. 3,431. 3,775. Soft Rectangle Table with 26 1 /2 height legs RSTTWE30481( )( ) 3,046. 3,101. 3, RSTTWE36541( )( ) 3,125. 3,198. 3,569. Soft Rectangle Table with 28 3 /8 height legs RSTTWE30482( )( ) 3,109. 3,163. 3, RSTTWE36542( )( ) 3,189. 3,261. 3,632. Specification Information Example: RSTRWE361 ( )( ) R Reff ST Sliding Table R Round W Wood surface E 1 thick diameter /2 height leg V316 Finish 111T Leg Finish To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish V1, V2, V3 wood only 2. Leg Textured finish: 111T, 115T, 118T Column and base are color matched. Column=smooth Base=textured Assembly required, ships knock down. Grommets are not an option for these tables. 102

104 Tables, 1 Sliding, Solid description d w th pattern no. Solid Round Table with 26 1 /2 height legs 36 1 RSTRSE361( )( ) $8, RSTRSE421( )( ) 9,581. Round Table with 28 3 /8 height legs 36 1 RSTRSE362( )( ) 8, RSTRSE422( )( ) 9,581. Soft Square Table with 26 1 /2 height legs 36 1 RSTSSE361( )( ) 7, RSTSSE421( )( ) 8,818. Soft Square Table with 28 3 /8 height legs 36 1 RSTSSE362( )( ) 7, RSTSSE362( )( ) 7,476. Soft Rectangle Table with 26 1 /2 height legs RSTTSE30481( )( ) 9, RSTTSE36541( )( ) 10,216. Soft Rectangle Table with 28 3 /8 height legs RSTTSE30482( )( ) 9, RSTTSE36542( )( ) 10,216. Reff Profiles Example: RSTRSE361 ( )( ) R Reff ST Sliding Table R Round S Solid E 1 thick diameter /2 height leg AW Worksurface finish 111T Leg Finish Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Worksurface finish: AW=Artic White, only 2. Leg finish Textured: 111T, 115T, 118T Assembly required. Ships knocked down. Grommets are not an option for these tables. Artic White finish available for solid tops. Column and base are color matched. Column=smooth Base=textured 103

105 Top support components Painted or Plated Legs 26 1 /2 high planning description dia. w h d pattern no. P1 P2 P3 Column leg, Interaction style (rectangular plate) /2 RSC $253. $267. $280. Ships with wood screws for fasening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted finish only. 4 Plain Cylinder (26 1 /2 high) /2 RCB Painted and PD, PT and PZ plated finishes. Set of four column legs (4 dia.), Interaction style (triangular plate) /2 RSC4-( ) ,034. 1,088. Painted finishes only. T-leg, Interaction style 26 1 /2 24 RIB24T Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted options only T-Leg, plain tube style 26 1 /2 20 RCB20T-( ) /2 24 RCB24T-( ) /2 30 RCB30T-( ) /2 40 RCB40T-( ) Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted and PD, PT and PZ plated finish options. Specification Information Example: R S C RSC Reff Support Cylinder To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish type, where applicable 2. Finish Finish type options: P = Paint (P1, P2, P3) Cylinder bases, T-legs, X-bases are Knoll Interaction style. Trim ring will be black. Interaction style cylinder base, column legs, T-leg, and X-base are not available in plated finishes. Refer to Planning Guide for top-base matrix, pages 140 and 141. Only the plain cylinder and tube legs can be ordered in plated and painted finishes. Interaction style legs are only available in painted finishes. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. All bases include 1 1 /2 leveller. 104

106 Top support components Painted or Anodized Legs 26 1 /2 high planning description h pattern no. list L-Leg 26 1 /2 RPL1( ) $617. Reverse L-Leg 26 1 /2 RPRL1( ) 617. Soft Rectangular Leg 26 1 /2 RPS1( ) 638. Reff Profiles Example: RPL1 ( ) RP Reff Profiles L Leg /2 h AN Leg finish RL = Reverse Leg S = Soft Rectangular Leg Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish: Painted or Anodized (AA, AN, AP, AU) 105 Legs are sold in pairs. These legs include 1 leveller. Products on this page are 26 1 /2 h. Products should not be mixed with 28 3 /8 h components. For L, Reverse L and Soft Rectangular Legs, same criteria applies as the column legs, when referencing the planning guide; pages 140 and 141. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles.

107 Top support components Painted or Plated Bases 26 1 /2 high planning description h dia. pattern no. P1 P2 P3 X-base 26 1 /2 28 RIB28X-( ) $597. $628. $ /2 32 RIB32X-( ) Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted finishes only. Spider base, plain tube style 26 1 /2 24 RCB24X /2 28 RCB28X /2 36 RCB36X Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted and PD, PT and PZ plated finishes. Drum base 26 1 /2 RSD1427-( ) 1,154. 1,213. 1, /2 RSD1827-( ) 1,254. 1,318. 1, /2 RSD2027-( ) 1,294. 1,358. 1, /2 RSD2427-( ) 1,549. 1,628. 1, /2 RSD3027-( ) 1,732. 1,817. 1,908. Painted finishes only. Specification Information Example: RIB28X R Reff I Interaction B Base 28 Diameter X X-base To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish type, where applicable 2. Finish Finish type options: P = Paint (P1, P2, P3) Cylinder bases, T-legs, X-bases are Knoll Interaction style. Trim ring will be black. Interaction style cylinder base, column legs, T-leg, and X-base are not available in plated finishes. Refer to Planning Guide for top-base matrix, pages 140 and 141. Only the plain cylinder and tube legs can be ordered in plated and painted finishes. Interaction style legs are only available in painted finishes. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. All bases include 1 1 /2 leveller. 106

108 Top support components Laminate or Wood Bases 26 1 /2 high planning description dia. w h d pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Drum base /2 RSD1427-( ) n/a $1,349. $1,553. $2, /2 RSD1827-( ) n/a 1,466. 1,687. 2, /2 RSD2027-( ) n/a 1,514. 1,740. 2, /2 RSD2427-( ) n/a 1,814. 2,087. 2, /2 RSD3027-( ) n/a 2,027. 2,328. 3,143. T-base (hardware included)* /2 12 RST1-( ) /2 12 RST2-( ) /2 12 RST3-( ) /2 12 RST4-( ) , /2 12 RST5-( ) , /2 12 RST6-( ) ,340. L-base (hardware included), non-handed* /2 12 RSL12-( ) /2 12 RSL15-( ) /2 12 RSL20-( ) /2 12 RSL24-( ) /2 12 RSL30-( ) /2 12 RSL36-( ) , /2 12 RSL42-( ) , /2 12 RSL48-( ) ,340. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RSD1427 R Reff S Support D Drum base 14 Diameter 27 Height 2 Finish type R319 V2- Med. Cherry To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish type 2. Finish Finish type options: L = Laminate 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 Refer to Planning Guide for top-base matrix, pages 140 and 141. All bases include 1 1 /2 leveller. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. T and L bases are not recommended for supporting conference tops. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. 107

109 Top support components Painted or Plated Legs 28 3 /8 high planning description dia. w he d pattern no. P1 P2 P3 Column Leg, Interaction style w/ rectanglar plate (desk height) 4 dia 28 3 /8 RSDHC ( )( ) $267. $280. $292. Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted finishes only. Set of 4 Column legs, Interaction style w/triangular plate (desk height) 4 dia 28 3 /8 RSDHC4( )( ) 1,036. 1,087. 1,142. Painted finishes only. T-Leg, plain tube style (desk height) 28 3 /8 20 RCDHB20T ( )( ) /8 24 RCDHB24T ( )( ) /8 30 RCDHB30T ( )( ) /8 40 RCDHB40T ( )( ) Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted and PD, PT and PZ plated finishes. T-Leg, Interaction style (desk height) 28 3 /8 24 RIBDH24T ( )( ) Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted finishes only. Specification Information Example: RSDHCP111 R Reff S Support DH Desk Height C Column Leg P Finish type, paint 111 Finish, Jet Black To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish Type, where applicable P = Paint (P1, P2, P3) 2. Finish see matrix on Reff Profiles Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profilesand Reff Profiles. Cylinder/column leg bases, T-Legs, X-bases are Knoll Interaction style. Trim ring will be black. Interaction style legs and bases are not available in plated finishes. Only the plain cylinder and the tube legs can be ordered in plated and painted finishes. All bases include 1 1 /2 leveller. Refer to Top to Base matrix, pages 140 and 141 in the Reff planning guide. Products on this page are 28-3/8 high /8 h desk height products should not be mixed with 26 1 /2 h components /8 h components when used with 1 1 /4 worksurfaces achieve overall desk height of 29 5 /8 h. 28-3/8 desk height products may be specified for freestanding or panel based applications. 108

110 Top support components Painted or Anodized Legs 28 3 /8 high planning description h pattern no. list L-Leg 28 3 /8 RPL2( ) $617. Reverse L-Leg 28 3 /8 RPRL2( ) 617. Soft Rectangular Leg 28 3 /8 RPS2( ) 638. Reff Profiles Example: RPL1 ( ) RP Reff Profiles L Leg /2 h AN Leg finish RL = Reverse Leg S = Soft Rectangular Leg Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish: Painted or Anodized (AA, AN, AP, AU) 109 Legs are sold in pairs. These legs include 1 leveller. Products on this page are 28 3 /8 h. Products should not be mixed with 26 1 /2 h components. For L, Reverse L and Soft Rectangular Legs, same criteria applies as the column legs, when referencing the planning guide; pages 140 and 141. Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles.

111 Top support components Painted or Plated Bases 28 3 /8 high planning description dia. w h d pattern no. P1 P2 P3 X-base (desk height) 28 3 /8 28 RIBDH28X ( )( ) $628. $660. $ /8 32 RIBDH32X ( )( ) Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted finishes only. Spider base, plain tube style (desk height) 28 3 /8 24 RCBDH24X ( )( ) /8 28 RCBDH28X ( )( ) /8 36 RCBDH36X ( )( ) Ships with wood screws for fastening to underside of worksurface into pilot hole location. Painted and PD, PT and PZ plated finishes. Drum Base (desk height) /8 RSDHD1428 ( )( ) 1,213. 1,273. 1, /8 RSDHD1828 ( )( ) 1,318. 1,383. 1, /8 RSDHD2028 ( )( ) 1,358. 1,425. 1, /8 RSDHD2428 ( )( ) 1,628. 1,708. 1, /8 RSDHD3028 ( )( ) 1,817. 1,909. 2,004. Painted finishes only. Base Support Column, 3 dia /8 RSDHC3 ( )( ) Painted and PD, PN and PU plated finishes. Example: RCBDH24X R Reff I Interaction B Base DH Desk height 28 Diameter X X-base P Finish type, paint 111 Finish, Jet Black Specification Information To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish Type, where applicable P = Paint (P1, P2, P3) 2. Finish see matrix on Reff Profiles Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profilesand Reff Profiles. 110 Refer to Top to Base matrix, pages 140 and 141 in the Reff planning guide. Products on this page are 28-3/8 high /8 h desk height products should not be mixed with 26 1 /2 h components /8 h components when used with 1 1 /4 worksurfaces achieve overall desk height of 29 5 /8 h. 28-3/8 desk height products may be specified for freestanding or panel based applications. Interaction style legs and bases are only available in painted finishes. Only plain cylinder and tube style legs can be ordered in plated and painted finishes.

112 Top support components Laminate or Wood Bases 28 3 /8 high planning description dia. w h d pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 Drum Base (desk height) /8 RSDHD1428 ( )( ) n/a $1,418. $1,630. $2, /8 RSDHD1828 ( )( ) n/a 1,540. 1,771. 2, /8 RSDHD2028 ( )( ) n/a 1,589. 1,826. 2, /8 RSDHD2428 ( )( ) n/a 1,904. 2,192. 2, /8 RSDHD3028 ( )( ) n/a 2,128. 2,445. 3,301. T-base, desk height (hardware included) /8 12 RSDHT1 ( )( ) /8 12 RSDHT2 ( )( ) /8 12 RSDHT3 ( )( ) , /8 12 RSDHT4 ( )( ) , /8 12 RSDHT5 ( )( ) , /8 12 RSDHT6 ( )( ) ,042. 1,409. L-base, desk height (hardware included, non-handed) /8 12 RSDHL12 ( )( ) /8 12 RSDHL15 ( )( ) /8 12 RSDHL20 ( )( ) /8 12 RSDHL24 ( )( ) /8 12 RSDHL30 ( )( ) , /8 12 RSDHL36 ( )( ) , /8 12 RSDHL42 ( )( ) , /8 12 RSDHL48 ( )( ) ,042. 1,409. Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RSDHD1428 R Reff S Support DH Desk Height D Drum base 14 Diameter 28 Height 2 Finish type, V2 V316 Finish, Maple To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish Type, where applicable L = Laminate 1=V1 2=V2 3=V3 2. Finish see matrix on Reff Profiles Applicable finishes are listed on Reff Profiles and Reff Profiles. Wood T and L bases are not recommended for supporting conference tops. All bases include 1 1 /2 leveller. Product on this page Excluding any vertical surface, ie; modesty panels over 48, will accept wood grain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Refer to Top to Base matrix, pages 140 and 141 in the Reff planning guide. Products on this page are 28-3/8 high /8 h desk height products should not be mixed with 26 1 /2 h components /8 h components when used with 1 1 /4 worksurfaces achieve overall desk height of 29 5 /8 h. 28-3/8 desk height products may be specified for freestanding or panel based applications. 111

113 Top support components Fixed Height and Height Adjustable C-Leg and T-Leg Bases description type w* w d pattern no. 24 Deep C-Leg Bases Fixed Shown 30 Deep C-Leg Bases Fixed Shown Fixed (F) Pin-Set (P) Handcrank (H) Electric (E) Advanced Electric (A) For use with 36 W, 24 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC3423( )( )( )( ) $955. $1,273. $1,909. $3,316. $3,491. For use with 42 W, 24 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC4023( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 48 W, 24 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC4623( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 54 W, 24 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC5223( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 60 W, 24 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC5823( )( )( )( ) ,273. 1,909. 3,316. 3,491. For use with 66 W, 24 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC6423( )( )( )( ) ,295. 1,932. 3,338. 3,514. For use with 72 W, 24 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC7023( )( )( )( ) ,295. 1,932. 3,338. 3,514. For use with 36 W, 30 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC3429( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 42 W, 30 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC4029( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 48 W, 30 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC4629( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 54 W, 30 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC5229( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 60 W, 30 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC5829( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. For use with 66 W, 30 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC6429( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. For use with 72 W, 30 D Reff Profiles C-Leg Top RSBC7029( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. Specification Information Example: RSBC5829HS, 9005, 613 RSB Universal Base C C-Leg 58 Width 29 Depth H Handcrank S Shroud 9005 Black Base Finish 613 Shroud/Feet Paint Finish w * = nominal width 1. Base Type: (F) = Fixed (27 High) (P) = Pin-Set (22-35 High) (H) = Handcrank (22-35 High) (E) = Electric ( /2 High) (A) = Advanced Electric ( /2 High) Base height ranges shown do not include worksurface thickness. 2. Shroud Options: (N) = Leg without a metal shroud (S) = Painted metal shroud to surround lower leg with matching foot. Add $100 to the list price. 3. Base Finish: default black paint (9005) 4. Shroud/Feet Paint Finish, when applicable Bases are designed for use with corresponding worksurfaces to create freestanding tables. Worksurfaces must be specified separately. Base comes with worksurface mounting hardware and leveling glides with 1 /4 of height adjustability. 23 D C-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 24 D. 29 D C-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 30 D. 29 D T-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 36 D centered over feet. 16 D Corner bases support 48 x48 curvilinear corner tops up to 30 D. 36 W C-Leg bases (except for Pin-set) support tops up to 60 w centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). 36 W Pin-Set C-Leg bases cannot support tops wider than the base. 42 W C-Leg bases support tops up to 66 W centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). 48,54,60 and 66 W C-Leg and T-Leg bases support tops up to 30 wider than the base centered over feet (max 15 overhang on each side). 72 W C-Leg and T-Leg bases support tops up to 96 W centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). Bases have a default black paint finish (9005). Painted lower leg shroud and feet can be specified in Knoll Core paint finishes. Fixed and Pin-Set bases support up to 440lbs. Handcrank bases support up to 260lbs. Electric bases support up to 300lbs. Pin-Set base adjusts on 1 increments. Crank handle is located on the right side of the base. Five turns of the handle adjust worksurface

114 Top support components Fixed Height and Height Adjustable C-Leg and T-Leg Bases Advanced Electric (A) description type w* w d pattern no. Fixed (F) Pin-Set (P) Handcrank (H) Electric (E) 30 Deep T-Leg Bases For use with 48 W, 30 or 36 D Reff Profiles RSBT4629( )( )( )( ) $1,000. $1,318. $1,955. $3,360. $3,536. T-Leg Top For use with 54 W, 30 or 36 D Reff Profiles RSBT5229( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. T-Leg Top For use with 60 W, 30 or 36 D Reff Profiles RSBT5829( )( )( )( ) 1,000. 1,318. 1,955. 3,360. 3,536. T-Leg Top For use with 66 W, 30 or 36 D Reff Profiles RSBT6429( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. T-Leg Top Pin-Set Shown RSBT7029( )( )( )( ) 1,023. 1,341. 1,977. 3,381. 3,559. For use with 72 W, 30 or 36 D Reff Profiles T-Leg Top C-Leg Corner Base For use with Reff Profiles Corner C-Leg Top RSBK464616( )( )( )( ) 1,545. 2,023. 3,000. 5,087. 5,355. Fixed Shown Reff Profiles Specification Information Example: RSBC5829HS, 9005, 613 RSB Universal Base C C-Leg 58 Width 29 Depth H Handcrank S Shroud 9005 Black Base Finish 613 Shroud/Feet Paint Finish w * = nominal width 1. Base Type: (F) = Fixed (27 High) (P) = Pin-Set (22-35 High) (H) = Handcrank (22-35 High) (E) = Electric ( /2 High) (A) = Advanced Electric ( /2 High) Base height ranges shown do not include worksurface thickness. 2. Shroud Options: (N) = Leg without a metal shroud (S) = Painted metal shroud to surround lower leg with matching foot. Add $100 to the list price. 3. Base Finish: default black paint (9005) 4. Shroud/Feet Paint Finish, when applicable Bases are designed for use with corresponding worksurfaces to create freestanding tables. Worksurfaces must be specified separately. Base comes with worksurface mounting hardware and leveling glides with 1 /4 of height adjustability. 23 D C-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 24 D. 29 D C-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 30 D. 29 D T-Leg bases support rectangular tops up to 36 D centered over feet. 16 D Corner bases support 48 x48 curvilinear corner tops up to 30 D. 36 W C-Leg bases (except for Pin-set) support tops up to 60 w centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). 36 W Pin-Set C-Leg bases cannot support tops wider than the base. 42 W C-Leg bases support tops up to 66 W centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). 48,54,60 and 66 W C-Leg and T-Leg bases support tops up to 30 wider than the base centered over feet (max 15 overhang on each side). 72 W C-Leg and T-Leg bases support tops up to 96 W centered over feet (max 12 overhang on each side). Bases have a default black paint finish (9005). Painted lower leg shroud and feet can be specified in Knoll Core paint finishes. Fixed and Pin-Set bases support up to 440lbs. Handcrank bases support up to 260lbs. Electric bases support up to 300lbs. Pin-Set base adjusts on 1 increments. Crank handle is located on the right side of the base. Five turns of the handle adjust worksurface

115 Worksurface 1 1/4 Rectilinear and curvilinear corners for C-Leg and T-Leg bases 24,30 and 36 deep description type d* d w* w pattern no. L V1 V2 V3 C-Leg and T-Leg Rectangular Tops For use with 24 Deep C-Leg base RSA3423N( )( ) $391. $441. $503. $ RSA4023N( )( ) RSA4623N( )( ) RSA5223N( )( ) RSA5823N( )( ) RSA6423N( )( ) RSA7023N( )( ) For use with 30 Deep C-Leg base RSA3429N( )( ) RSA4029N( )( ) For use with 30 Deep C-Leg or T-Leg base RSA4629N( )( ) RSA5229N( )( ) RSA5829N( )( ) RSA6429N( )( ) RSA7029N( )( ) For use with 30 Deep T-Leg base RSA4635N( )( ) RSA5235N( )( ) , RSA5835N( )( ) , RSA6435N( )( ) , RSA7035N( )( ) ,174. C-Leg Corner Tops, 24 or 30 Deep For use with C-Leg Corner base RCA464623N( )( ) ,073. 1,231. 1, RCA464629N( )( ) 1,045. 1,201. 1,377. 1,856. Specification Information Example: RSA 5829N, L, 118 R Reff S Straight Rectangular A 1 1 /4 thick 58 Width 29 Depth N No Grommets L Finish type 118 Bright White Laminate w * and d * = nominal dimensions To order please specify pattern number including: 1. Finish Type: (L) = Laminate (1)=V1 (2)=V2 (3)=V3 2. Finish: Applicable finishes are listed on page 5 and 6. Product on this page will accept woodgrain laminate where laminate is currently an option. Worksurfaces on this page are designed for use with fixed and height adjustable C-Leg, T-Leg and corner bases to create freestanding tables. 23,29 and 35 rectangular worksurfaces are for use with corresponding depth fixed and height adjustable C-Leg bases and T-Leg bases. 48 x48 curvilinear corner worksurfaces are for use with 16 D 3-legged fixed and height adjustable corner bases. Worksurfaces are pre-drilled with pilot holes for use with wood screws. Actual worksurfaces are undersized by 1 on each side edge and by 1 on the back edge. 114

116 Interaction Base Options performance overview Four Star Base Designed for round, teardrop, blunted round, rounded square and square top shapes. Available in fixed height, fixed height with locking casters. Fixed height base is 28 5 /8 high with top. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and add 1 1 /2 to height. Available separately on page 176. Column Base Overall height is 28 with standard Interaction 7 /8 top. Designed for Amoeba, Bat, and Large round (60 diameter) tops. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and increase height 1 1 /2. See page 177. Available separately on page 176. Fixed Base 28 1 /2 overall height. Available split-top mechanism adjusts 7 above and 5 3 /4 below main surface, and tilts +9 / 15. Legs include integral vertical wire managers. Crossbeam is designed for cable storage, and includes removable black PVC cable flap. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and increase table height 1 1 /2. See Accessories, page 177. Interaction Manually Adjustable Base 26 1 / /2 height range, on 1 /2 increments. Available split-top mechanism adjusts 7.5 above and 4.5 below main surface, and tilts +/ 15. Legs include integral vertical wire manager. Crossbeam is designed for cable storage, and includes removable black PVC cable flap. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and increase table height range 1 1 /2. See Accessories, page 177. Manually Adjustable 115

117 Interaction Base Options performance overview Crank Adjustable Base 23 1 /2-35 height adjustment range. Available split-top mechanism adjusts 7.5 above and 4.5 below main surface, and tilts +/ lb. load capacity. Five turns of the handle adjust worksurface one inch. Handle folds beneath worksurface when not in use, and has soft rubber grip. Legs include integral vertical wire manager. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and increase table height range 1 1 /2. See Accessories, page 177. Crank Adjustable Counterforce Base Counterforce provides rapid sit-to-stand adjustment, in a range. Available split-top mechanism adjusts 7.5 above and 4.5 below main surface, and tilts +/ lb. load capacity (depending on top size and configuration) Hand paddle actuates the vertical adjustment mechanism. Safety interlock prevents inadvertent height change. Legs include integral vertical wire manager. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and increase table height range 1 1 /2. See Accessories, page 177. Counterforce Top Crank Adjustable Base 27 1 / /4 height adjustment range. Available split-top mechanism adjusts 7.5 above and 4.5 below main surface, and tilts +/ lb. load capacity. Five turns of the handle adjust worksurface one inch. Handle is removable and stores beneath worksurface when not in use. Legs include integral vertical wire manager. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and increase table height range 1 1 /2. See Accessories, page 177. Top Crank Adjustable Electric Adjustable Base Electric adjustable base provides sit-to-stand adjustment, in a 27 1 / /4 range. Available split-top mechanism adjusts 7.5 above and 4.5 below main surface, and tilts +/ lb. load capacity Rocker switch actuates the vertical adjustment mechanism. Legs include integral vertical wire manager. Locking casters can be retrofitted, and increase table height range 1 1 /2. See Accessories, page Electric Adjustable

118 Interaction Table Planning schematic plan views Scale = 1 /4-1 0 INTERACTION TOP TABLES Four Star Base Round Blunted Round Teardrop Rounded Square Square C-Leg Base Hot Dog Small Boomerang Large Boomerang Interaction Corner Counterforce Split Top Counterforce 117

119 Interaction Table Planning schematic plan views Scale = 1 /4-1 0 Columns Base and T-Leg Amoeba Bat Large Round Racetrack 40" C-Leg Tables with Morrison, Equity, Reff, and Dividends Tops Straight Corner Split-Top Split-Top Corner 118

120 Interaction Table Planning schematic plan views Scale = 1 /4-1 0 INTERACTION TOP TABLES Four Star Base Adjustability Ranges Manually Adjustable Counterforce Crank Adjustable Split Top Top Crank Adjustable Electric Adjustable Interaction 119

121 Interaction Table Planning schematic plan views Scale = 1 /4-1 0 C-Leg and T-Leg Tables for Morrison, Equity, Reff, and Dividends End View Fixed Height Manually Adjustable Crank Adjustable Counterforce T-Leg Inside View Outside View 120

122 Ordering Interaction Tables This price list provides you with the product information you need to specify and order Interaction Tables. Interaction Tables are a complete collection of portable and adjustable work and meeting tables. Interaction tables are appropriate for open plan workstations and private offices, conference areas and team spaces, cafeterias and training areas. Interaction Tables may be planned alone, or in combination with Knoll Morrison, Equity, Reff or Dividends Horizon office systems. Top options include original 7 /8 thick Interaction tops, 1 1 /4 Morrison tops, 1 1 /4 Equity and Dividends tops, 1 5 /32 Reff tops, and 1 1 /8 Cascade edge tops. Base options include fixed or adjustable height four star, C-leg, T-leg, columns, Counterforce, and electric adjustable tables. How to Order Interaction Tables Interaction Tables are specified by pattern numbers containing a logical, alphanumeric sequence describing the top type, size, features, base, and finish type of the table. Specific finishes are listed as color fields following the pattern number. To specify a table consult the order code examples and application notes at the bottom of each page. For example, to order an Interaction 48 boomerang shape, adjustable height table, in yellow laminate with black edge, dark grey base, and yellow trim rings, specify: IT B4848 AM; M12, EN, 113, T5 Details follow: I Interaction Table T Interaction top B Boomerang shape 48 Width 48 Depth A Adjustable base M Plastic laminate M12 Yellow top EN Black edge 113 Dark grey base T5 Yellow trim rings To expedite correct entry of your order, be certain all catalog numbers, quantities, colors, and area identifications are completely specified. Also include complete purchase order numbers, bill-to and ship-to addresses, a contact name, and specific shipping dates required. Knoll, Inc Water Street P.O. Box 157 East Greenville, PA Attention: Order Entry Tel Fax Once your order is entered at Knoll, an acknowledgment will be mailed within five days of the original acknowledgment. If it is necessary to revise your order, please contact your Customer Service representative. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Tops Interaction, 7 /8 thick Plastic laminate or veneer surface on 3 /4 medium density fiberboard; vinyl T-mold edge. Interaction split top and corner Counterforce table tops have 2 radius at all corners. Morrison System, 1 1 /4 thick Plastic laminate or veneer surface on 1 1 /8 particle board, with balanced construction backer. Front and back edges of rectangular laminate tops are post-formed, with a 9 /32 radius at top and bottom. Front and back edges of other laminate tops are matching radius T-mold. Side edges of Morrison laminate tops are self-edge laminate. Front and back edges of veneer tops are solid 3 /16 veneer with 3 /16 radius top and bottom; side edges are veneer. Equity, 1 1 /4 thick Plastic laminate on 1 1 /8 particle board, with laminate backer. All edges have 2mm PVC edgeband or T-mold extrusion. Reff System, 1 5 /32 thick Plastic laminate or veneer surface on 1 1 /8 particle board with balanced construction backer. Edges of plastic laminate tops are matching solid color-core PVC with 2.8 mm radius top and bottom. Veneer tops have veneer edge with 2.4 mm radii. Dividends Horizon, 1 1 /4 thick Plastic laminate with laminate backer. All edges have 2mm ABS edgeband or T-mold extrusion. Cascade Edge, 1 1 /8 thick Please Note: Cascade Edge worksurfaces are wrapped with a 3D laminate sheet that is heated and pressed around an FSC-certified substrate. 3D laminate is more susceptible to denting, impact, tearing and marring than conventional high pressure laminate and should be handled with care. Do not drag worksurfaces across any flooring surface. Treat Cascade Edge worksurfaces like veneer worksurfaces for optimum performance under normal conditions. Cascade Edge worksurfaces come with a 10 year warranty that covers defects in workmanship and materials. This warranty does not cover damage occurring during or after installation. Cascade edge worksurfaces in solid colors utilize a non-pvc construction and are also free of any plasticizers, pthalates and lead content. Bases Four star or column base Die-cast aluminum base, 3 3 /4 diameter 14-gauge steel tube, with powder epoxy finish. Trim ring is ABS plastic. Base diameters for 30 or 36 round are 28 ; for 42 or 48 round are 32 ; for columns are 5. C-Leg or T-Leg base Die cast aluminum feet, extruded aluminum vertical legs, and 14-gauge steel crossbeam, with powder epoxy finish. Tops are supported by 14-gauge, formed steel cantilevers, with color-integral polystyrene end caps. Each leg includes black, dual-durometer, extruded PVC wire manager, and polystyrene trim ring. Crossbeam includes removable black PVC cable flap. (Does not apply to top crank and electric adjustable bases) Counterforce base Crossbeam is 11-gauge steel weldment, containing a variable-output spring-actuated mechanism that will counterbalance up to 155 lbs. (including top). Hand-paddle actuates the vertical locking mechanism; safety interlock prevents inadvertent height change. Large gear pulley and spiral are mineral-filled acetyl. Springs are 5-gauge chrome silicon alloy steel wire. Glides and Casters Glides are 2 diameter nylon, with 3 /4 steel stems and optional 1 /2 high nylon glide extenders. Locking casters are nylon with 1 /2 steel stems. Casters can be retrofitted in the field. Casters may replace glides on any Interaction table, and raise top 1 1 /2. See page 177. Weight Loads Interaction Tables exceed ANSI/BIFMA standards for worksurface loads: 4.5 lbs per linear inch (functional load) or 10 lbs per linear inch (proof load) except for Counterforce tables. Counterforce table bases support a maximum load of 150 lbs. including the weight of the worksurface, (example: weight of worksurface plus weight of objects on table must not total more than 150 lbs. if placed on a Counterforce base). Note to Knoll Dealer Sellers: The products contained in this price list are also available through the Knoll Essentials program, with limited exceptions. For additional information, please contact your customer service representative or visit Knoll Exchange. Interaction 121

123 Interaction Core Finishes Interaction, Morrison, Equity, Reff and Dividends Horizon Tables Tops: Solid laminate: 111 Jet Black 114 Folkstone Grey (was LA) 117 Soft Grey (was M42) 118 Bright White 119 Pumice (was LF) 121 Micro Grey (comes with 114 Folkstone grey edge only on Reff tables) 122 Brushed Sand (comes with 119 Pumice edge only on Reff tables) 123 Brushed Grey (comes with 128 Fog edge only on Reff tables) 128 Fog 129 Micro Sand (comes with 119 Pumice edge only on Reff tables) Woodgrain laminate: 124 Medium Cherry (not available on Reff tables) 125 Natural Maple (not available on Reff tables) 126 Natural Cherry (not available on Reff tables) 127 Walnut (not available on Reff tables) Top Edges: 111 Jet Black 113 Dark Grey (was Y3) 114 Folkstone Grey (was LA) 115 Medium Grey (was Y2) 117 Soft Grey (was E) 118 Bright White 119 Pumice (was LF) 124 Medium Cherry (not available on Interaction or Reff tables) 125 Natural Maple (not available on Interaction or Reff tables) 126 Natural Cherry (not available on Interaction or Reff tables) 127 Walnut (not available on Interaction or Reff tables) 128 Fog Note: Edge finish not optional on Reff tables; matches surface unless noted differently above. Bases: 113 Dark Grey (was Y3) 115 Medium Grey (was Y2) 117 Soft Grey (was E) Trim Rings: T1 Black T2 Blue T3 Green T4 Red T5 Yellow Core laminate color options are identical for Type L, Type M and Type P laminates. For Legacy laminates, Type L refers to Morrison legacy laminates, Type M refers to Equity and Dividends legacy laminates, and Type P refers to Reff legacy laminates. V1 Techwood Closed Pore Y811 Natural (Legacy: VT) Y821 Blonde Maple (Legacy: V4 Maple) Y831 Light Cherry (Legacy: V6 Cherry) Y316 Maple Y319 Cherry Y323 Medium Walnut Y326 Dark Mahogany Y327 Light Oak Y329 Medium Oak Y341 Wenge Y342 Medium Teak Y343 Dark Grey Oak Y344 Espresso Y851 Black Oak V2 Natural Veneer Closed Pore V312 Bronzed Cherry V316 Maple (Legacy: VK) V411 Light Walnut V415 Peacock Green Walnut V417 Old English Walnut V418 Smoked Walnut V421 Chalk Oak V423 Light Oak V425 Amber Oak V427 Brown Oak V433 Light Fawn Cherry V436 Medium Brown Cherry V439 Straight Anigre V440 Natural Hemlock Y841 Ebony Y861 Grigio Y871 Iced Sycamore In October, 2009 all Morrison veneer finishes were transferred from our East Greenville Plant to our Toronto Plant. All veneer finishes were changed to closed pore finishing and assigned new finish codes. This price list contains pricing for Core finishes. Core finishes include some Morrison veneer finishes formally referred to as Techgrain (cross-referenced above) as well as numerous new veneer finishes now available on Morrison. For detailed pricing of Legacy finishes, please refer to the latest release of CAP worksheet or contact your customer services representative. *Patterned laminates (Micro, Brushed and woodgrain laminates) are available on Morrison rectangular tables only. 122

124 Interaction Legacy Finishes Note: Specify Legacy finishes to match existing product only. Legacy finishes are not available for new customers. Interaction Top Tables Tops: Type L Plastic Laminates LN Black Type M Plastic Laminates M1 Light grey M12 Yellow M15 Blue M33 Red Interaction tops may also be specified in any standard Morrison, Equity, Dividends or Reff laminate or veneer listed on this page. Top Edges: EN Black EL Light grey EG Medium grey Note: EG Medium Grey edge matches LG Medium Grey laminate. (Y2) Medium Grey base finish matches Dividends Medium Grey and Equity Medium Grey (Y2) paint. EG Medium Grey edge does not match the (Y2) Medium Grey base finish. Trim Rings: T1 Black T2 Blue T3 Green T4 Red T5 Yellow Morrison Top Tables Tops: Type L Plastic Laminates LL Light grey LG Medium grey LD Sand LB Snow Legacy Veneer Finishes Veneer Group 1 C6F3 Medium Brown Mahogany (Legacy: V7) C6F4 Medium Red Mahogany (Legacy: V8) C6F5 American Cherry Techgrain (Legacy: V9) Trim Rings: T1 Black T2 Blue T3 Green T4 Red T5 Yellow Equity Top Tables Tops: Type M Plastic Laminates M1 Light grey M5 Dark neutral M80 Taupe M89 Medium grey (Slate) M95 Grey granite M96 Rose granite MP70 Light oak MP58 Dark mahogany M2 Soft white MR6 Winter grey matrix ES7 White essence PA Pearwood MC Caramel maple CM Clear maple SD Sand B Snow WM Warm cherry 2mm Top Edges: Y2 Medium grey (Slate) D Dark neutral R Taupe Y3 Dark grey SD Sand B Snow CM Clear Maple MC Caramel Maple WM Warm Cherry MT Metal Trim Rings: T1 Black T2 Blue T3 Green T4 Red T5 Yellow Reff Top Tables Tops: Type P Plastic Laminates PLC Oyster grey PLD Charcoal grey PLE Willow grey Trim Rings: T1 Black T2 Blue T3 Green T4 Red T5 Yellow Dividends Top Tables Top Laminates: MR6 Winter grey matrix CM Clear maple PA Pearwood MC Caramel maple WM Warm cherry SD Sand M1 Light grey Top Edges: Y1 Pewter Y2 Medium grey Y3 Dark grey SD Sand B Snow CM Clear Maple MC Caramel Maple WM Warm Cherry MT Metal Trim Rings: T1 Black T2 Blue T3 Green T4 Red T5 Yellow Interaction Veneer Group 2: C6F6 American Cherry (Legacy: VX) C6F7 Medium Red Mahogany (Legacy: VZ) Note: Add 10% to the list price of any laminate product when specifying a legacy laminate 123

125 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height Interaction tops round, blunted round and teardrop description type w d h pattern no. laminate M/L/P V1 V2 Round table Fixed height /8 IT R3000 X( ) $744. $1,194. $1, /8 IT R3600 X( )( ) ,343. 1, /8 IT R4200 X( )( ) 1,006. 1,635. 1, /8 IT R4800 X( ) 1,160. 1,926. 2,244. Fixed height with casters /8 IT R3000 W( ) ,234. 1, /8 IT R3600 W( ) ,381. 1, /8 IT R4200 W( ) 1,045. 1,673. 1,940. Blunted round table Fixed height /8 IT D3624 X( ) ,488. 1, /8 IT D4230 X( ) 1,095. 1,782. 2,073. Fixed height with casters /8 IT D3624 W( ) ,527. 1, /8 IT D4230 W( ) 1,135. 1,821. 2,110. Teardrop table Fixed height /8 IT T3618 X( ) ,488. 1, /8 IT T4221 X( ) 1,095. 1,782. 2,073. Fixed height with casters /8 IT T3618 W( ) ,527. 1, /8 IT T4221 W( ) 1,135. 1,821. 2,110. Specification Information Example: IT T3618 XL; 117, 117, 117, T2 I Interaction Table T Interaction top T Teardrop 36 Diameter 18 Depth of return X Base type L Top type 117 Top finish 117 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T2 Trim ring Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Type L laminates M Type M laminates P Type P laminates V Group V1 or V2 veneers Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Interaction tops come standard with black edge. Four-star base tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning any Knoll system. Tops are 7 /8 thick, with T-mold edge. Fixed height four-star base tables are 28 5 /8 H. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters for adjustable tables must be specified separately (see Accessories, p. 177). 124

126 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height Interaction tops square and rounded square description type w d h pattern no. laminate M/L/P V1 V2 Square table Fixed height /8 IT E3030 X( ) $835. $1,345. $1, /8 IT E3636 X( ) ,488. 1, /8 IT E4242 X( ) 1,095. 1,782. 2,073. Fixed height with casters /8 IT E3030 W( ) ,382. 1, /8 IT E3636 W( ) ,527. 1, /8 IT E4242 W( ) 1,135. 1,821. 2,110. Rounded square table Fixed height /8 IT S3030 X( ) ,345. 1, /8 IT S3636 X( ) ,488. 1, /8 IT S4242 X( ) 1,095. 1,782. 2,073. Fixed height with casters /8 IT S3030 W( ) ,382. 1, /8 IT S3636 W( ) ,527. 1, /8 IT S4242 W( ) 1,135. 1,821. 2,110. Interaction Specification Information Example: IT S3636 XL;118,118,117,T1 I Interaction Table T Interaction top S Rounded square 36 Width 36 Depth X Base type L Top type 118 Top finish 118 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Type L laminates M Type M laminates P Type P laminates V Group V1 or V2 veneers Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Interaction tops come standard with a black edge. Four-star base tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning with any Knoll system. Tops are 7 /8 thick, with T-mold edge. Fixed height four-star base tables are 28 5 /8 H. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters for adjustable tables must be specified separately (see Accessories, p. 177). 125

127 C-leg tables, fixed and adjustable height, linking tops Interaction tops laminate description type w d h pattern no. M/L/P V1 V2 Hot dog shape C-leg base table Fixed height IT H5424 B ( ) $1,160. $1,685. $2,024. Crank adjustable / /2 IT H5424 D ( ) 2,512. 3,037. 3,376. Manually adjustable /2-29 IT H5424 A ( ) 1,473. 1,996. 2, IT H5424 C ( ) 3,482. 4,007. 4,345. Boomerang shape C-leg base table Fixed height IT B4848 B ( ) 1,255. 1,791. 2, IT B6060 B ( ) 1,411. 2,009. 2,449. Manually adjustable /2-29 IT B4848 A ( ) 1,566. 2,098. 2, /2-29 IT B6060 A ( ) 1,717. 2,318. 2,759. Crank adjustable / /2 IT B4848 D ( ) 2,605. 3,141. 3, / /2 IT B6060 D ( ) 2,760. 3,361. 3,800. Counterforce IT B4848 C ( ) 3,574. 4,109. 4, IT B6060 C ( ) 3,730. 4,332. 4,773. Specification Information Example: IT B4848 AL;119, 119, 117, T1 I Interaction Table T Interaction top B Top shape 48 Width 48 Depth A Base type L Top type 119 Top finish 119 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Type L laminates M Type M laminates P Type P laminates V Group V1 or V2 veneers Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Base types: A Adjustable B Fixed height C Counterforce D Crank Note: All veneer Interaction tops come standard with a black edge. C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning with any Knoll system. Manually adjustable height base may be manually adjusted to allow top height at any 1 /2 increment from 25 1 /2 to 29. Fixed height tables are 28 H. The patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 22 7 /8 to 34 1 /2 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Handle may be specified right only on hot dog and boomerang table. Counterforce tables may be adjusted by user from H, without tools. Base may be adjusted to counterbalance 0-90 lb. load. All bases provide integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height 1 1 /2. Stacking glide extenders raise top height in 1 /2 increments. (See Accessories, p. 177). 126

128 C-leg tables, Counterforce corners and split-tops Interaction tops description type w d h pattern no. laminate M/L/P V1 V2 Curvilinear corner shape Counterforce IT C3624C( ) $3,405. $3,900. $4, IT C4224C( ) 3,482. 3,995. 4, IT C4824C( ) 3,574. 4,109. 4, IT C4830C( ) 3,638. 4,178. 4,580. Curvilinear corner split-top Counterforce IT C36SSC( ) 4,644. 5,153. 5, IT C42SSC( ) 4,720. 5,234. 5, IT C48SSC( ) 4,815. 5,349. 5, IT C48DSC( ) 4,876. 5,417. 5,820. Straight split-top for Morrison or Reff Counterforce IT S30DSC( ) 4,256. 4,759. 5, IT S36DSC( ) 4,334. 4,846. 5, IT S42DSC( ) 4,412. 4,946. 5, IT S48DSC( ) 4,488. 5,030. 5,433. Specification Information Example: IT C42SSCM; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table T Interaction top C Corner shape 42 Size S Depth S Split-top C Counterforce base M Top type 117 Top finish 117 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Type L laminates M Type M laminates P Type P laminates V Group V1 or V2 veneers Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Interaction tops come standard with a black edge. C-leg Counterforce tables may be planned with any Knoll system to provide high performance adjustability. Curvilinear corner shapes plan in 36,42 or 48 VDT corner applications, with 3 /4 finger/cord clearance around table. Specify 23 D for adjacent 24 D worksurfaces, 29 D for adjacent 30 D worksurfaces. Straight split top fits in 30,36,42 or 48 W, 30 D space in Morrison or Reff planning, or 28,34.40,or46 space in Equity planning. Counterforce tables may be adjusted by user from high, with fingertip control. Base may be adjusted to counterbalance 0-80lb. load on split-top tables. Interaction All bases provide integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range by 1 1 /2. (See Accessories, page 177). 127

129 C-leg tables, Counterforce corners and split-tops Interaction tops description type w d h pattern no. laminate M/L/P V1 V2 Straight split-top for Equity Counterforce 27 1 / IT S3ODSCM $4,256. n/a n/a 33 1 / IT S36DSCM 4,334. n/a n/a 39 1 / IT S42DSCM 4,412. n/a n/a IT S48DSCM 4,488. n/a n/a Specification Information Example: IT C42SSCM; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table T Interaction top C Corner shape 42 Size S Depth S Split-top C Counterforce base M Top type 117 Top finish 117 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Type L laminates M Type M laminates P Type P laminates V Group V1 or V2 veneers Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Interaction tops come standard with a black edge. C-leg Counterforce tables may be planned with any Knoll system to provide high performance adjustability. Curvilinear corner shapes plan in 36,42 or 48 VDT corner applications, with 3 /4 finger/cord clearance around table. Specify 23 D for adjacent 24 D worksurfaces, 29 D for adjacent 30 D worksurfaces. Straight split top fits in 30,36,42 or 48 W, 30 D space in Morrison or Reff planning, or 28,34.40,or46 space in Equity planning. Counterforce tables may be adjusted by user from high, with fingertip control. Base may be adjusted to counterbalance 0-80lb. load on split-top tables. All bases provide integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range by 1 1 /2. (See Accessories, page 177). 128

130 T-leg and column base tables, file top Interaction tops description w d h pattern no. laminate M/L/P V1 V2 Racetrack shape T-leg table IT O7236 T( ) $1,300. $1,873. $2, IT O8436 T( ) 1,430. 2,060. 2,471. Large round column base table /8 IT R6000 Z( ) 1,473. 2,105. 2,557. Amoeba shape column base table /8 IT A6060 Z( ) 1,779. 2,543. 3,093. Example: IT A6060 ZM; 117, 177, 117, T2 I Interaction T Interaction top A Amoeba 60 Width 60 Depth Z Columns base M Top type 117 Top finish 117 Soft grey top edge 117 Soft grey base T2 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Type L laminates M Type M laminates P Type P laminates V Group V1 or V2 veneers Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Grommet Options: Add suffix G for racetrack large round, amoeba, or bat shape table with center grommet, 3 diameter. Note: All veneer Interaction tops come standard with a black edge. Amoeba-shape column base table is ideal for team workspaces. Amoeba measures 70 diagonally. Bat-shape column base table works interactively with 36 diameter tables. Actual dimension from inside curve to inside curve is 40. Specify glide extenders for bat when aligning with fixed height round tables. T-leg and column-base tables are fixed at 28 H. Stacking glide extenders raise top height in 1 /2 increments. (See Accessories, p.177) Racetrack-shape file top may be used to create file island with 3-drawer lateral files. 72 racetrack may be set on top of back-to-back 36 wide files; 96 racetrack fits above cluster of four 30 wide files. Interaction T-leg and column-base tables may be used with any Knoll system. 129

131 T-leg and column base tables, file top Interaction tops laminate description w d h pattern no. M/L/P V1 V2 Bat shape column base table /8 IT A4860 Z( ) $1,779. $2,543. $3,093. Racetrack shape file top (no base) IT O7236 N( ) ,064. 1, IT O9636 N( ) ,234. 1,616. Specification Information Example: IT A6060 ZM; 117, 177, 117, T2 I Interaction T Interaction top A Amoeba 60 Width 60 Depth Z Columns base M Top type 117 Top finish 117 Soft grey top edge 117 Soft grey base T2 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Type L laminates M Type M laminates P Type P laminates V Group V1 or V2 veneers Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Grommet Options: Add suffix G for racetrack large round, amoeba, or bat shape table with center grommet, 3 diameter. Note: All veneer Interaction tops come standard with a black edge. Amoeba-shape column base table is ideal for team workspaces. Amoeba measures 70 diagonally. Bat-shape column base table works interactively with 36 diameter tables. Actual dimension from inside curve to inside curve is 40. Specify glide extenders for bat when aligning with fixed height round tables. T-leg and column-base tables are fixed at 28 H. Stacking glide extenders raise top height in 1 /2 increments. (See Accessories, p.177) Racetrack-shape file top may be used to create file island with 3-drawer lateral files. 72 racetrack may be set on top of back-to-back 36 wide files; 96 racetrack fits above cluster of four 30 wide files. T-leg and column-base tables may be used with any Knoll system. 130

132 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height Morrison tops round description type w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Round table Fixed height IN R3000 X( ) $977. $1,159. $1, IN R3600 X( ) 1,005. 1,191. 1, IN R4200 X( ) 1,064. 1,260. 1, IN R4800 X( ) 1,286. 1,524. 1,758. Fixed height with casters IN R3000 W( ) 1,007. 1,193. 1, IN R3600 W( ) 1,034. 1,225. 1, IN R4200 W( ) 1,093. 1,296. 1,491. Example: IN R3600 XV; V9, 117, T2 I Interaction Table N Morrison top R Round 36 Diameter X Base type V Top type V9 Top finish 117 Base finish T2 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Plastic laminates V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Four-star base tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning any Knoll system. Fixed height four-star base tables are 29 H. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters for adjustable tables must be specified separately (see Accessories, p. 177). Morrison System Top Tables 131

133 C-leg tables, fixed height Morrison tops description w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Rectangular fixed height table / /8 IN S3024 B( ) $810. $1,015. $1, / /8 IN S3030 B( ) ,100. 1, / /8 IN S3624 B( ) ,058. 1, / /8 IN S3630 B( ) ,139. 1, / /8 IN S4224 B( ) ,100. 1, / /8 IN S4230 B( ) ,179. 1, / /8 IN S4824 B( ) ,139. 1, / /8 IN S4830 B( ) ,222. 1, / /8 IN S6024 B( ) ,222. 1, / /8 IN S6030 B( ) 1,040. 1,300. 1,564. Curvilinear corner fixed height table / /8 IN C4224 B( ) 1,236. 1,543. 1, / /8 IN C4824 B( ) 1,330. 1,664. 1, / /8 IN C4830 B( ) 1,408. 1,760. 2,111. Specification Information Example: IN S4824 BL; 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top S Straight 48 Width 24 Depth B Base type L Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Fixed height tables provide portable, independent surfaces in open plan workstations or private offices. Fixed height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Morrison planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. Table base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides provide 1 /2 adjustment for leveling. Stacking glide extenders raise top height in 1 /2 increments. Rectangular tables accommodate 18 D suspended, floorstanding or mobile pedestals; 30 D tables accommodate 24 D pedestals. Actual rectangular table widths are 3 /16 less than nominal. Actual corner table widths are 1 /2 less than nominal. 132

134 C-leg tables, manually adjustable Morrison tops description w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Rectangular manually adjustable table / /2 IN S3024 A ( ) $1,122. $1,326. $1, / /2 IN S3030 A ( ) 1,188. 1,408. 1, / /2 IN S3624 A ( ) 1,153. 1,368. 1, / /2 IN S3630 A ( ) 1,222. 1,449. 1, / /2 IN S4224 A ( ) 1,188. 1,408. 1, / /2 IN S4230 A ( ) 1,254. 1,488. 1, / /2 IN S4824 A ( ) 1,222. 1,449. 1, / /2 IN S4830 A ( ) 1,286. 1,532. 1, / /2 IN S6024 A ( ) 1,286. 1,532. 1, / /2 IN S6030 A ( ) 1,349. 1,609. 1,871. Curvilinear corner manually adjustable table / /2 IN C4224 A ( ) 1,543. 1,854. 2, / /2 IN C4824 A ( ) 1,638. 1,971. 2, / /2 IN C4830 A ( ) 1,716. 2,069. 2,422. Specification Information Example: IN S4830 AV; V9, 117, T4 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth A Base type V Top type V9 Top finish 117 Base finish T4 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Manually adjustable tables provide portable, adjustable height surfaces in open plan workstations or private offices. C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Morrison planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. Table base may be manually adjusted to allow top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Actual rectangular table widths are 3 /16 less than nominal. Actual corner table widths are 1 /2 less than nominal. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2 (see Accessories, p. 177). Morrison System Top Tables 133

135 C-leg tables, crank adjustable Morrison tops description w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Rectangular adjustable table / /4-35 IN S3024 D(R/L)( ) $2,163. $2,369. $2, / /4-35 IN S3030 D(R/L)( ) 2,229. 2,449. 2, / /4-35 IN S3624 D(R/L)( ) 2,196. 2,409. 2, / /4-35 IN S3630 D(R/L)( ) 2,260. 2,492. 2, / /4-35 IN S4224 D(R/L)( ) 2,229. 2,449. 2, / /4-35 IN S4230 D(R/L)( ) 2,293. 2,531. 2, / /4-35 IN S4824 D(R/L)( ) 2,260. 2,492. 2, / /4-35 IN S4830 D(R/L)( ) 2,329. 2,572. 2, / /4-35 IN S6024 D(R/L)( ) 2,329. 2,572. 2, / /4-35 IN S6030 D(R/L)( ) 2,391. 2,572. 2,815. Curvilinear corner adjustable table / /4-35 IN C4224 D( ) 2,586. 2,749. 3, / /4-35 IN C4824 D( ) 2,680. 3,015. 3, / /4-35 IN C4830 D( ) 2,759. 3,112. 3,464. Example: IN S4830 DRV; V9, 117, T4 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth D Base type R Right handle location V Top type V9 Top finish 117 Base finish T4 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Handle location 10. Top type Specify top type: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Handle location (rectangular only): R Right hand L Left hand 134 Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Crank adjustable C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Morrison planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. The hand crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /4 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Handle may be specified right or left on rectangular tables. Handle is located in center for corner tables. Actual rectangular table widths are 1 less than nominal. Actual corner table widths are 1 1 /2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2 (see Accessories, p. 177).

136 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable Morrison tops description w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Rectangular counterbalanced table IN S3024 C( ) $3,136. $3,337. $3, IN S3030C( ) 3,201. 3,420. 3, IN S3624 C( ) 3,168. 3,379. 3, IN S3630 C( ) 3,234. 3,462. 3, IN S4224 C( ) 3,201. 3,420. 3, IN S4230 C( ) 3,265. 3,501. 3, IN S4824 C( ) 3,234. 3,462. 3, IN S4830 C( ) 3,299. 3,541. 3, IN S6024 C( ) 3,299. 3,541. 3, IN S6030 C( ) 3,362. 3,620. 3,882. Specification Information Example: IN S4824 CL; 117, 117, T2 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top S Rectangular 48 Width 24 Depth of return C Base type L Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T2 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Adjustable height Counterforce -leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Morrison planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. Fingertip control allows user to adjust from seated- to standing-work height (26-41 ) without tools or effort. Counterforce tables may be adjusted by the user to balance loads of 0-90 lbs. Note: 24 D rectangular Counterforce tables provide only 16 D clear kneespace inside 12 H crossbeam, 12 above the floor. ANSI/BIFMA recommends minimum 15 D kneespace, increasing on a diagonal to 23 D at toe height. Morrison System Top Tables Actual rectangular table widths are 3 /16 less than nominal. For corner Counterforce applications, see page

137 T-leg tables Morrison tops description w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Straight table / /8 IN S4830T ( ) $974. $1,222. $1, / /8 IN S4836T ( ) 1,040. 1,300. 1, / /8 IN S6030T ( ) 1,040. 1,300. 1, / /8 IN S6036T ( ) 1,122. 1,399. 1, / /8 IN S7230T ( ) 1,122. 1,399. 1, / /8 IN S7236T ( ) 1,178. 1,467. 1,844. Rounded end table /8 IN U6330T ( ) 1,367. 1,709. 2, /8 IN U6636T ( ) 1,462. 1,829. 2, /8 IN U7530T ( ) 1,462. 1,829. 2, /8 IN U7836T ( ) 1,564. 1,950. 2,341. Specification Information Example: IN U6330TL; 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top U Rounded end 63 Width 30 Depth T Base type L Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. T-leg tables provide shared meeting and work surfaces in conjunction with Morrison System or other Interaction tables. Tops are standard detail Morrison 1 1 /4. T-leg base tables are fixed at 28 3 /8 H. Tables may be increased in height in 1 /2 increments by specifying extender glides (see Accessories, p. 177). 136

138 C-leg tables, split top Morrison tops description type w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Split-top straight table Fixed height / /8 IN S36DS B( ) $2,149. $2,376. $2, / /8 IN S42DS B( ) 2,183. 2,417. 2, / /8 IN S48DS B( ) 2,215. 2,461. 2,704. Manually adjustable / /2 IN S36DS A( ) 2,461. 2,684. 2, / /2 IN S42DS A( ) 2,493. 2,725. 2, / /2 IN S48DS A( ) 2,526. 2,768. 3,011. Crank adjustable / /4-35 IN S36DS D( ) 3,501. 3,722. 3, / /4-35 IN S42DS D( ) 3,533. 3,768. 4, / /4-35 IN S48DS D( ) 3,567. 3,810. 4,051. Split-top corner table Fixed height / /8 IN C48SS B( ) 2,570. 2,902. 3, / /8 IN C48DS B( ) 2,645. 2,997. 3,348. Manually adjustable / /2 IN C48SS A( ) 2,879. 3,208. 3, / /2 IN C48DS A( ) 2,956. 3,306. 3,659. Crank adjustable / /4-35 IN C48SS D( ) 3,919. 4,250. 4, / /4-35 IN C48DS D( ) 3,997. 4,347. 4,701. Specification Information Example: IN S36DS AL; 117, 117, T2 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top S Straight 36 Width D 30 Deep S Split-top A Base type L Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T2 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Base types: A Adjustable B Fixed height D Crank Specify top types: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Trim ring finish Top finish Base finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Split-top C-leg tables provide easy, infinite adjustability of full width, keyboard-and-mouse surface. Split-top adjustable height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Morrison planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. Fingertip control allows user to adjust front surface for keyboard and mouse from 5 1 /2 above to 6 1 /2 below rear surface. Front surface may also be adjusted /+15. Adjustable table base may be manually adjusted to allow rear top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Fixed height table base fixes rear worksurface at 28 3 /8 H. Knoll s patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /4 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Handle is located in front center of rear surface. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters raise heights 1 1 /2. For Counterforce split-top applications, see page 127. Morrison System Top Tables 137

139 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable Morrison tops description w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Rectangular adjustable table / /4 IN S3024 K( ) $1,763. $1,931. $2, / /4 IN S3030 K( ) 1,818. 1,997. 2, / /4 IN S3624 K( ) 1,791. 1,966. 2, / /4 IN S3630 K( ) 1,844. 2,030. 2, / /4 IN S4224 K( ) 1,818. 1,997. 2, / /4 IN S4230 K( ) 1,871. 2,062. 2, / /4 IN S4824 K( ) 1,844. 2,030. 2, / /4 IN S4830 K( ) 1,897. 2,098. 2, / /4 IN S6024 K( ) 1,897. 2,098. 2, / /4 IN S6030 K( ) 1,950. 2,098. 2,253. Curvilinear corner adjustable table / /4 IN C4224 K( ) 2,109. 2,240. 2, / /4 IN C4824 K( ) 2,187. 2,458. 2, / /4 IN C4830 K( ) 2,250. 2,538. 2,824. Rect. Split-top adj., top crank / /4 IN S36DS K( ) 2,854. 3,036. 3, / /4 IN S42DS K( ) 2,882. 3,071. 3, / /4 IN S48DS K( ) 2,908. 3,108. 3,305. Curv. corner split-top adj., top crank table / IN C48SS K( ) 3,197. 3,466. 3, / IN C48DS K( ) 3,259. 3,544. 3,832. Specification Information Example: IN S4830 K;L, 117, 117 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth K Base type L Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Base types: K Top crank Specify top types: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2. Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Crank adjustable C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Morrison planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. The hand crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Five turns of the crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 27 1 /4 to 43 1 /4 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Rectangular table widths are 2 less than nominal while depths are 1 less than nominal. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. 138

140 C-leg tables, electric adjustable Morrison tops description w d h pattern no. laminate L veneer V1 V2 Rectangular electric adj. table / /4 IN S3024 E( ) $2,556. $2,722. $2, / /4 IN S3030 E( ) 2,608. 2,789. 2, / /4 IN S3624 E( ) 2,581. 2,756. 2, / /4 IN S3630 E( ) 2,636. 2,823. 3, / /4 IN S4224 E( ) 2,608. 2,789. 2, / /4 IN S4230 E( ) 2,662. 2,854. 3, / /4 IN S4824 E( ) 2,636. 2,823. 3, / /4 IN S4830 E( ) 2,688. 2,888. 3, / /4 IN S6024 E( ) 2,688. 2,888. 3, / /4 IN S6030 E( ) 2,741. 2,953. 3,167. Curvilinear corner electric adj. table / /4 IN C3624 E( ) 2,777. 3,057. 3, / /4 IN C4224 E( ) 2,840. 3,130. 3, / /4 IN C4824 E( ) 2,916. 3,218. 3, / /4 IN C4830 E( ) 2,966. 3,280. 3,586. Curv. corner split-top electric adj. table / /4 IN C48SS E( ) 3,924. 4,226. 4, / /4 IN C48DS E( ) 3,973. 4,288. 4,595. Specification Information Example: IN S4830 EL; 117, 117 I Interaction Table N Morrison 1 1 /4 top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth E Base type L Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Base types: E Electric Specify top types: L Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Note: All veneer Morrison tops come with matching veneer edge. Electric adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Electric adjustable C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Morrison planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. The electric adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Mechanism adjusts up or down at a rate of one inch per second through a27 1 /4 to 43 1 /4 height range. Up/down control may be located nearly anywhere on the underside of the table for either left handed or right handed operation. Rectangular table widths are 2 less than actual while depth is 1 less than actual for safety. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Morrison System Top Tables 139

141 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height Equity tops 2mm edge and 24mm waterfall edge round description type w d h pattern no. Round table 2mm edge solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Fixed height IE R3000 X2 $977. $1,012. $1, IE R3600 X2 1,005. 1,052. 1, IE R4200 X2 1,064. 1,100. 1, IE R4800 X2 1,286. 1,322. 1,357. Fixed height with casters IE R3000 W2 1,007. 1,041. 1, IE R3600 W2 1,034. 1,068. 1, IE R4200 W2 1,093. 1,129. 1,163. metal edge Round table 24mm waterfall edge Fixed height IE R3000 X3 1, IE R3600 X3 1, IE R4200 X3 1, IE R4800 X3 1,564. Fixed height with casters IE R3000 W3 1, IE R3600 W3 1, IE R4200 W3 1,318. Example: IE R3600 X3; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table E Equity top R Round 36 Diameter X Base type 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Four-star base tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning any Knoll system. Fixed height four-star base tables are 29 H. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters for adjustable tables must be specified separately (see Accessories, p. 177). Note: Y2 in the pattern number for the adjustable table refers to Y (base type) and 2 (edge finish), not Y2 Medium Grey. 140

142 C-leg tables, fixed height Equity tops description w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Straight fixed height table 28 1 / / /8 IE S3024 B2 $810. $846. $ / / /8 IE S3030 B / / /8 IE S3624 B / / /8 IE S3630 B / / /8 IE S4224 B / / /8 IE S4230 B , / / /8 IE S4824 B / / /8 IE S4830 B ,009. 1, / / /8 IE S6024 B ,009. 1, / / /8 IE S6030 B2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 IE S7224 B2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 IE S7230 B2 1,106. 1,141. 1,176. Curvilinear corner fixed height table 41 1 / / /8 IE C4224 B2 1,236. 1,272. 1, / / /8 IE C4824 B2 1,330. 1,366. 1, / / /8 IE C4830 B2 1,408. 1,445. 1,479. metal edge SpecificationInformation Example: IE S3624 B2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table E Equity 1 1 /4 top S Straight 36 Width 24 Depth B2 Fixed Height, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Fixed height tables provide portability in open plan workstations or private offices. Fixed height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Equity planning. Panel-mounted worksurfaces adjacent to curvilinear corner tables must be cantilevered, or desk end panel supported. Table base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides provide 1 /2 adjustment for leveling. Specify extender glides (see p. 177) for alignment with Equity panel-mounted worksurfaces. Rectangular tables accommodate 18 D suspended floorstanding or mobile Equity pedestals; 30 D tables accommodate 24 D pedestals. Specify extender glides for tables with floorstanding pedestals. Equity System Top Tables 141

143 C-leg tables, manually adjustable Equity tops description w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Straight manually adjustable table 28 1 / / /2 IE S3024 A2 $1,122. $1,156. $1, / / /2 IE S3030 A2 1,188. 1,223. 1, / / /2 IE S3624 A2 1,153. 1,190. 1, / / /2 IE S3630 A2 1,222. 1,256. 1, / / /2 IE S4224 A2 1,188. 1,223. 1, / / /2 IE S4230 A2 1,254. 1,288. 1, / / /2 IE S4824 A2 1,222. 1,256. 1, / / /2 IE S4830 A2 1,286. 1,322. 1, / / /2 IE S6024 A2 1,286. 1,322. 1, / / /2 IE S6030 A2 1,349. 1,384. 1, / / /2 IE S7224 A2 1,349. 1,384. 1, / / /2 IE S7230 A2 1,416. 1,451. 1,485. Curvilinear corner manually adjustable table 41 1 / / /2 IE C4224 A2 1,543. 1,578. 1, / / /2 IE C4824 A2 1,638. 1,673. 1, / / /2 IE C4830 A2 1,716. 1,751. 1,787. metal edge Example: IE C4830 A2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table E Equity 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth A2 Adjustable, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 142 Manually adjustable height tables provide portable, adjustable surfaces in open plan workstations or private offices. Manually adjustable height C leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Equity planning. Panel-mounted worksurfaces adjacent to curvilinear corner tables must be cantilevered, or desk end panel supported. Table base may be manually adjusted to allow top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height 1 1 /2. (See Accessories, p. 177)

144 C-leg tables, crank adjustable Equity tops description w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Straight crank adjustable table 28 1 / / /4-35 IE S3024 D(R/L)2 $2,134. $2,168. $2, / / /4-35 IE S3030 D(R/L)2 2,229. 2,264. 2, / / /4-35 IE S3624 D(R/L)2 2,196. 2,230. 2, / / /4-35 IE S3630 D(R/L)2 2,260. 2,295. 2, / / /4-35 IE S4224 D(R/L)2 2,215. 2,250. 2, / / /4-35 IE S4230 D(R/L)2 2,293. 2,330. 2, / / /4-35 IE S4824 D(R/L)2 2,260. 2,295. 2, / / /4-35 IE S4830 D(R/L)2 2,329. 2,365. 2, / / /4-35 IE S6024 D(R/L)2 2,329. 2,365. 2, / / /4-35 IE S6030 D(R/L)2 2,391. 2,427. 2,462. Curvilinear corner crank adjustable table 41 1 / / /4-35 IE C4224 D2 2,586. 2,621. 2, / / /4-35 IE C4824 D2 2,680. 2,715. 2, / / /4-35 IE C4830 D2 2,757. 2,791. 2,826. metal edge Example: IE C4830 D2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table E Equity 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth D Crank adjustable 2 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Handle location (rectangular only): R Right hand L Left hand Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Crank adjustable C leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Equity planning. Knoll s patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /2 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Handle may be specified right or left on rectangular tables. Handle is located in center for corner tables. Actual rectangular table widths are 3 /16 less than nominal. Actual corner table widths are 1 /2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2 (see Accessories, p. 177). Equity System Top Tables 143

145 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable Equity tops description w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Straight counterforce table 27 1 / IE S3024 C2 $3,136. $3,170. $3, / IE S3030 C2 3,201. 3,235. 3, / IE S3624 C2 3,168. 3,202. 3, / IE S3630 C2 3,234. 3,268. 3, / IE S4224 C2 3,201. 3,235. 3, / IE S4230 C2 3,265. 3,300. 3, / IE S4824 C2 3,234. 3,268. 3, / IE S4830 C2 3,299. 3,333. 3, / IE S6024 C2 3,299. 3,333. 3, / IE S6030 C2 3,362. 3,396. 3,431. metal edge Example: IE S4830 C2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table E Equity 1 1 /4 top S Top shape 48 Width 30 Depth C2 Base type, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring Specifiation Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 144 Adjustable height Counterforce C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Equity planning. Fingertip control allows user to adjust from seated to standing-work height (26-41 ) without tools or effort. Counterforce tables may be adjusted by the user to counterbalance loads of 0-90 lbs. Worksurfaces adjacent to curvilinear corner tables must be cantilevered not desk end panel-supported. Table base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides provide 1 /2 adjustment for leveling. Note: 24 D Counterforce tables provide only 16 clear kneespace inside the 12 1 /4 cross-beam, 12 above the floor. ANSI/BIFMA recommends minimum 19 D kneespace, increasing to 23 D at toe height. For corner Counterforce applications, see page 127.

146 T-leg tables Equity tops description w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Straight table 46 1 / / /8 IE S4830 T2 $974. $1,009. $1, / / /8 IE S4836 T2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 IE S6030 T2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 IE S6036 T2 1,122. 1,156. 1, / / /8 IE S7230 T2 1,122. 1,156. 1, / / /8 IE S7236 T2 1,178. 1,215. 1,249. metal edge Rounded end table /8 IE U6330 T2 1,367. 1,401. 1, /8 IE U6636 T2 1,462. 1,498. 1, /8 IE U7530 T2 1,462. 1,498. 1, /8 IE U7836 T2 1,564. 1,597. 1,632. Specification Information Example: IE U7530 T2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table E Equity top U Rounded end 75 Width 30 Depth T2 Base type, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Base finish 117 Top edge finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish T-leg tables provide shared meeting or worksurfaces in conjunction with Equity or other Interaction tables. T-leg base tables are fixed at 28 3 /8 H. Stacking glide extenders may be specified to increase table height in 1 /2 increments. (See Accessories, p. 177) Equity System Top Tables 145

147 C-leg tables, split-top Equity tops description type w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Split-top straight table Fixed height 33 1 / / /8 IE S36DS B2 $2,149. $2,185. $2, / / /8 IE S48DS B2 2,215. 2,250. 2,284. metal edge Manually adjustable 33 1 / / /2 IE S36DS A2 2,461. 2,495. 2, / / /2 IE S48DS A2 2,526. 2,560. 2,595. Crank adjustable 33 1 / / /2-35 IE S36DS D2 3,501. 3,534. 3, / / /2-35 IE S48DS D2 3,567. 3,602. 3,636. Split-top curvilinear corner table Fixed height / /8 IE C48SS B2 2,570. 2,603. 2, / /8 IE C48DS B2 2,645. 2,679. 2,714. Manually adjustable / /2 IE C48SS A2 2,879. 2,912. 2, / /2 IE C48DS A2 2,956. 2,991. 3,025. Crank adjustable / /2-35 IE C48SS D2 3,919. 3,953. 3, / /2-35 IE C48DS D2 3,997. 4,033. 4,067. Example: IE S36DS A2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table E Equity 1 1 /4 top S Straight 36 Width D Depth S Split top A2 Base type, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify Color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 146 Split-top tables provide easy, infinite adjustability of full width, keyboard-and-mouse surface. Split-top adjustable height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Equity planning. Fingertip control allows user to adjust front surface for keyboard and mouse from 5 1 /2 above to 6 1 /2 below rear surface. Front surface may also be adjusted +/-15. Adjustable table base may be manually adjusted to allow rear top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Fixed height table base fixes rear worksurface at 28 3 /8 H. Knoll s patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /2 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. For split top tables, handle is located in front center of rear worksurface. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters raise heights 1 1 /2. For Counterforce split-top applications, see page 177.

148 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable Equity tops description w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Straight crank adjustable table / /4 IE S3024 K2 $1,741. $1,768. $1, / /4 IE S3030 K2 1,818. 1,846. 1, / /4 IE S3624 K2 1,791. 1,819. 1, / /4 IE S3630 K2 1,844. 1,872. 1, / /4 IE S4224 K2 1,805. 1,834. 1, / /4 IE S4230 K2 1,871. 1,900. 1, / /4 IE S4824 K2 1,844. 1,872. 1, / /4 IE S4830 K2 1,897. 1,928. 1, / /4 IE S6024 K2 1,897. 1,928. 1, / /4 IE S6030 K2 1,950. 1,977. 2,007. Curvilinear corner crank adjustable table / /4 IE C4224 K2 2,109. 2,138. 2, / /4 IE C4824 K2 2,187. 2,215. 2, / /4 IE C4830 K2 2,247. 2,277. 2,305. metal edge Straight split-top crank adjustable table / /4 IE S42DS K2 2,854. 2,883. 2, / /4 IE S48DS K2 2,908. 2,937. 2,966. Curv. corner split-top crank adj. table / /4 IE C48SS K2 3,197. 3,225. 3, / /4 IE C48DS K2 3,259. 3,287. 3,314. Specification Information Example: IE C4830 K2; 117, 117, 117 I Interaction Table E Equity 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth K Top crank adjustable 2 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. The hand crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Five turns of the crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 27 1 /4 to 43 1 /4 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Equity rectangular table widths are 3 1 /2 less than nominal (1 1 /2 less for centerline planning rule and 1 less on either side for safety) while depths are 1 less than nominal for safety. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2. Equity System Top Tables 147

149 C-leg tables, electric adjustable Equity tops description w d h pattern no. solid PVC edge woodgrain PVC edge Straight electric adjustable table / /4 IE S3024 E2 $2,556. $2,584. $2, / /4 IE S3030 E2 2,608. 2,637. 2, / /4 IE S3624 E2 2,581. 2,609. 2, / /4 IE S3630 E2 2,636. 2,664. 2, / /4 IE S4224 E2 2,608. 2,637. 2, / /4 IE S4230 E2 2,662. 2,689. 2, / /4 IE S4824 E2 2,636. 2,664. 2, / /4 IE S4830 E2 2,688. 2,719. 2, / /4 IE S6024 E2 2,688. 2,719. 2, / /4 IE S6030 E2 2,741. 2,770. 2,796. Curvilinear corner electric adjustable table / /4 IE C3624 E2 2,777. 2,829. 2, / /4 IE C4224 E2 2,840. 2,909. 2, / /4 IE C4824 E2 2,916. 2,999. 3, / /4 IE C4830 E2 2,966. 3,058. 3,149. metal edge Curv. corner split-top electric adj. table / /4 IE C48SS E2 3,924. 4,007. 4, / /4 IE C48DS E2 3,973. 4,065. 4,158. Example: IE C4830 E2; 117, 117, 117 I Interaction Table E Equity 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth E Electric adjustable 2 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish 148 Electric adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. The electric adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Mechansim adjusts up or down at a rate of one inch per second through a27 1 /4 to 43 1 /4 height range. Up/down control may be located nearly anywhere on the underside of the table for either left handed or right handed operation.. Equity rectangular table widths are 3 1 /2 less than normal (1 1 /2 less for centerline planning rule and 1 less on either side for safety) while depths are 1 less than nominal for safety. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2.

150 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height Reff tops round description type w d h pattern no. laminate P Round table Fixed height IS R3000 X( ) $1,078. $1,345. $1, IS R3600 X( ) 1,107. 1,379. 1, IS R4200 X( ) 1,175. 1,461. 1, IS R4800 X( ) 1,419. 1,768. 2,128. veneer V1 veneer V2 Reff System Top Tables Fixed height with casters IS R3000 W( ) 1,110. 1,384. 1, IS R3600 W( ) 1,139. 1,421. 1, IS R4200 W( ) 1,206. 1,503. 1,809. Example: IS R3600 XP; 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table S Reff System top R Round 36 Diameter X Base type P Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top types: P Type P laminates V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish 149 Four-star base tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning any Knoll system. Fixed height four-star base tables are 28 5 /8 H. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters for adjustable tables must be specified separately (see Accessories, p. 177).

151 C-leg tables, fixed height Reff tops description w d h pattern no. laminate P Rectangular fixed height table /4 IS S3024 B( ) $895. $1,116. $1, /4 IS S3030 B( ) ,208. 1, /4 IS S3624 B( ) ,160. 1, /4 IS S3630 B( ) 1,002. 1,254. 1, /4 IS S4224 B( ) ,208. 1, /4 IS S4230 B( ) 1,038. 1,296. 1, /4 IS S4824 B( ) 1,002. 1,254. 1, /4 IS S4830 B( ) 1,073. 1,343. 1, /4 IS S6024 B( ) 1,073. 1,343. 1, /4 IS S6030 B( ) 1,141. 1,430. 1,716. Curvilinear corner fixed height table /4 IS C4224 B( ) 1,361. 1,701. 2, /4 IS C4824 B( ) 1,462. 1,828. 2, /4 IS C4830 B( ) 1,546. 1,935. 2,321. veneer V1 veneer V2 Example: IS S4824 BP; 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table S Reff System top S Straight 48 Width 24 Depth B Base type P Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish 150 Fixed height tables provide portable, independent surfaces in open plan workstations or private offices. Fixed height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Reff Systems planning, with 1 5 /32 tops. Table base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides provide 1 /2 adjustment for leveling. Rectangular tables accommodate 18 D suspended, floorstanding or mobile System 6 pedestals; 30 D tables accommodate 24 D pedestals.

152 C-leg tables, manually adjustable Reff tops description w d h pattern no. laminate P Rectangular manually adjustable table /2 IS S3024 A( ) $1,205. $1,426. $1, /2 IS S3030 A( ) 1,276. 1,518. 1, /2 IS S3624 A( ) 1,239. 1,473. 1, /2 IS S3630 A( ) 1,310. 1,565. 1, /2 IS S4224 A( ) 1,276. 1,518. 1, /2 IS S4230 A( ) 1,347. 1,606. 1, /2 IS S4824 A( ) 1,310. 1,565. 1, /2 IS S4830 A( ) 1,382. 1,652. 1, /2 IS S6024 A( ) 1,377. 1,652. 1, /2 IS S6030 A( ) 1,454. 1,740. 2,026. veneer V1 veneer V2 Reff System Top Tables Curvilinear corner manually adjustable table /2 IS C4224 A( ) 1,669. 2,009. 2, /2 IS C4824 A( ) 1,772. 2,138. 2, /2 IS C4830 A( ) 1,857. 2,245. 2,632. Example: IS S4830 AW; Y311, 117, T1 I Interaction Table S Reff System top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth A Base type W Top type Y311 Top finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Top types: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Manually adjustable tables provide portable, adjustable surfaces in open plan workstations or private offices. Manually adjustable C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Reff Systems planning, with 1 5 /32 tops. Table base may be manually adjusted to allow top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2 (see Accessories, p. 177). 151

153 C-leg tables, crank adjustable Reff tops description w d h pattern no. laminate P Rectangular crank adjustable table IS S3024 D(L/R)( ) $2,247. $2,468. $2, IS S3030 D(L/R)( ) 2,317. 2,502. 2, IS S3624 D(L/R)( ) 2,281. 2,429. 2, IS S3630 D(L/R)( ) 2,351. 2,604. 2, IS S4224 D(L/R)( ) 2,317. 2,562. 2, IS S4230 D(L/R)( ) 2,388. 2,647. 2, IS S4824 D(L/R)( ) 2,351. 2,604. 2, IS S4830 D(L/R)( ) 2,426. 2,693. 2, IS S6024 D(L/R)( ) 2,418. 2,693. 2, IS S6030 D(L/R)( ) 2,496. 2,781. 3,067. Curvilinear corner crank adjustable table IS C4224 D( ) 2,711. 3,050. 3, IS C4824 D( ) 2,815. 3,178. 3, IS C4830 D( ) 2,900. 3,285. 3,674. veneer V1 veneer V2 Example: IS S4830 DLW; Y311, 117, T1 I Interaction Table S Reff System top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth D Base type L Left handle location W Top type Y311 Top finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Handle location 10. Top type Handle location (rectangular only): R Right hand L Left hand Top types: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish 152 Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Reff Systems planning, with 1 5 /32 tops. Knoll s patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /2 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Handle may be specified right on rectangular tables. Handle is located in center for corner tables. Actual rectangular table widths are 1 less than nominal. Actual corner table widths are 1 /2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2 (see Accessories, p. 177).

154 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable Reff tops description w d h pattern no. laminate P Rectangular Counterforce table / IS S3024 C( ) $3,216. $3,437. $3, / IS S3030 C( ) 3,286. 3,531. 3, / IS S3624 C( ) 3,249. 3,482. 3, / IS S3630 C( ) 3,325. 3,573. 3, / IS S4224 C( ) 3,286. 3,531. 3, / IS S4230 C( ) 3,360. 3,617. 3, / IS S4824 C( ) 3,325. 3,573. 3, / IS S4830 C( ) 3,395. 3,663. 3, / IS S6024 C( ) 3,395. 3,663. 3, / IS S6030 C( ) 3,466. 3,751. 4,040. veneer V1 veneer V2 Reff System Top Tables Example: IS S4824 CP; 117, 117, T4 I Interaction Table S Reff System top S Straight 48 Width 24 Depth of return C Base type P Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T4 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Adjustable height Counterforce C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Reff Systems planning, with 1 5 /32 tops. Fingertip control allows user to adjust from seated- to standingwork height (26-41 ) without tools or effort. Counterforce tables may be adjusted by the user to balance loads of 0-90 lbs. For corner Counterforce applications, see page

155 T-leg tables Reff tops description w d h pattern no. laminate P Straight table / /4 IS S4830 T( ) $1,073. $1,343. $1, / /4 IS S4836 T( ) 1,145. 1,430. 1, / /4 IS S6030 T( ) 1,145. 1,430. 1, / /4 IS S6036 T( ) 1,236. 1,537. 1, / /4 IS S7230 T( ) 1,236. 1,537. 1, / /4 IS S7236 T( ) 1,297. 1,612. 2,026. veneer V1 veneer V2 Rounded end table /4 IS U6330 T( ) 1,502. 1,877. 2, /4 IS U6636 T( ) 1,609. 2,010. 2, /4 IS U7530 T( ) 1,609. 2,010. 2, /4 IS U7836 T( ) 1,716. 2,147. 2,574. Example: IS U6330TW; Y311, 117, T2 I Interaction Table S Reff System top U Rounded end 63 Width 30 Depth T Base type W Top type Y311 Top finish 117 Base finish T2 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish T-leg tables provide shared meeting and work surfaces in conjunction with Reff Systems planning. T-leg base tables are fixed at 28 1 /4 H. Tables may be increased in height in 1 /2 increments by specifying extender glides (see Accessories, p. 177). 154

156 C-leg tables, split top Reff tops description type w d h pattern no. laminate P Split-top straight table Fixed height /4 IS S36DS B( ) $2,239. $2,493. $2, /4 IS S42DS B( ) 2,278. 2,534. 2, /4 IS S48DS B( ) 2,312. 2,579. 2,850. veneer V1 veneer V2 Reff System Top Tables Manually adjustable /2 IS S36DS A( ) 2,548. 2,801. 3, /2 IS S42DS A( ) 2,582. 2,845. 3, /2 IS S48DS A( ) 2,620. 2,891. 3,157. Crank adjustable IS S36DS D( ) 3,592. 3,844. 4, IS S42DS D( ) 3,626. 3,884. 4, IS S48DS D( ) 3,662. 3,931. 4,201. Split-top corner table Fixed height /4 IS C48SS B( ) 2,704. 3,064. 3, /4 IS C48DS B( ) 2,785. 3,173. 3,562. Manually adjustable /2 IS C48SS A( ) 3,011. 3,376. 3, /2 IS C48DS A( ) 3,094. 3,482. 3,867. Crank adjustable IS C48SS D( ) 4,051. 4,340. 4, IS C48DS D( ) 4,137. 4,524. 4,911. Example: IS S36DS AP; 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table S Reff System top S Straight 36 Width D Depth S Split-top A Base type P Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Base types: A Adjustable B Fixed height D Crank Specify top type: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish 155 Split-top C-leg tables provide easy, infinite adjustability of full width, keyboard-and-mouse surface. Split-top adjustable height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding Reff Systems planning, with 1 1 /4 tops. Fingertip control allows user to adjust front surface for keyboard and mouse from 5 1 /2 above to 6 1 /2 below rear surface. Front surface may also be adjusted +/-15. Adjustable table base may be manually adjusted to allow rear top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Fixed height table base fixes rear worksurface at 28 3 /8 H. Knoll s patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /2 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. For split top tables, handle is located at front center of rear surface. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters raise heights 1 1 /2. For Counterforce split-top applications, see page 177.

157 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable Reff tops description w d h pattern no. laminate P Rectangular crank adjustable table / /4 IS S3024 K( ) $1,832. $2,011. $2, / /4 IS S3030 K( ) 1,891. 2,038. 2, / /4 IS S3624 K( ) 1,861. 1,978. 2, / /4 IS S3630 K( ) 1,919. 2,123. 2, / /4 IS S4224 K( ) 1,891. 2,089. 2, / /4 IS S4230 K( ) 1,947. 2,159. 2, / /4 IS S4824 K( ) 1,919. 2,123. 2, / /4 IS S4830 K( ) 1,976. 2,198. 2, / /4 IS S6024 K( ) 1,972. 2,198. 2, / /4 IS S6030 K( ) 2,034. 2,268. 2,500. Curvilinear corner crank adjustable table / /4 IS C4224 K( ) 2,210. 2,489. 2, / /4 IS C4824 K( ) 2,293. 2,593. 2, / /4 IS C4830 K( ) 2,364. 2,680. 2,996. veneer V1 veneer V2 Rect. split-top crank adjustable table / /4 IS S36DS K( ) 2,929. 3,135. 3, / /4 IS S42DS K( ) 2,957. 3,168. 3, / /4 IS S48DS K( ) 2,987. 3,205. 3,425. Curv. corner split-top crank adj. table / /4 IS C48SS K( ) 3,305. 3,538. 3, / /4 IS C48DS K( ) 3,375. 3,689. 4,004. Example: IS S4830 K;P, 117, 117 I Interaction Table S Reff 1 1 /4 top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth K Base type P Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2. Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. The hand crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Five turns of the crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 27 to 43 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Rectangular table widths are 2 less than nominal while depths are 1 less than nominal for safety. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. 156

158 C-leg tables, electric adjustable Reff tops description w d h pattern no. laminate P Rectangular electric adjustable table / /4 IS S3024 E( ) $2,622. $2,804. $2, / /4 IS S3030 E( ) 2,679. 2,880. 3, / /4 IS S3624 E( ) 2,649. 2,840. 3, / /4 IS S3630 E( ) 2,710. 2,915. 3, / /4 IS S4224 E( ) 2,681. 2,880. 3, / /4 IS S4230 E( ) 2,738. 2,949. 3, / /4 IS S4824 E( ) 2,710. 2,915. 3, / /4 IS S4830 E( ) 2,768. 2,988. 3, / /4 IS S6024 E( ) 2,768. 2,988. 3, / /4 IS S6030 E ( ) 2,826. 3,060. 3,294. veneer V1 veneer V2 Reff System Top Tables Curvilinear corner electric adjustable table / /4 IS C3624 E( ) 2,777. 3,179. 3, / /4 IS C4224 E( ) 2,840. 3,257. 3, / /4 IS C4824 E( ) 2,916. 3,350. 3, / /4 IS C4830 E( ) 2,966. 3,406. 3,737. Curv. corner split-top electric adj. table / /4 IS C48SS E( ) 3,924. 4,361. 4, / /4 IS C48DS E( ) 3,973. 4,420. 4,746. Example: IS S4830 EP; 117, 117 I Interaction Table S Reff 1 1 /4 top S Rectangular 48 Width 30 Depth E Base type P Top type 117 Top finish 117 Base finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Specify top type: P Plastic laminate V Veneer Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish 157 Electric adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. The electric adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Mechanism adjusts up or down at a rate of one inch per second through a27 1 /4 to 43 1 /4 height range. Up/down control may be located nearly anywhere on the underside of the table for either left handed or right handed operation. Rectangular table widths are 2 less than actual while depths are 1 less than actual for safety. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2.

159 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height Dividends Horizon top 2mm edge round description type w d h pattern no. Round table 2mm edge laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Fixed height ID R3000 X2 $977. $1,012. $1, ID R3600 X2 1,005. 1,052. 1, ID R4200 X2 1,064. 1,100. 1, ID R4800 X2 1,286. 1,322. 1,357. Fixed height with casters ID R3000 W2 1,007. 1,041. 1, ID R3600 W2 1,034. 1,068. 1, ID R4200 W2 1,093. 1,129. 1,163. Example: ID R3600 X2; 117, 117, 117, T4 I Interaction Table D Dividends top R Round 36 Diameter X Base type 2 2 mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T4 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish Four-star base tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning any Knoll system. Fixed height four-star base tables are 28 5 /8 H. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters for adjustable tables must be specified separately (see Accessories, p. 177). Note: Y2 in the pattern number for the adjustable table refers to Y (base type) and 2 (edge finish), not Y2 Medium Grey. 158

160 C-leg tables, fixed height Dividends Horizon tops description w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Straight fixed height table / / /8 ID S3024 B2 $810. $846. $ / / /8 ID S3030 B / / /8 ID S3624 B / / /8 ID S3630 B / / /8 ID S4224 B / / /8 ID S4230 B , / / /8 ID S4824 B / / /8 ID S4830 B ,009. 1, / / /8 ID S6024 B ,009. 1, / / /8 ID S6030 B2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 ID S7224 B2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 ID S7230 B2 1,106. 1,141. 1,176. Dividends Horizon System Top Tables Curvilinear corner fixed height table / /8 ID C4224 B2 1,236. 1,272. 1, / /8 ID C4824 B2 1,330. 1,366. 1, / /8 ID C4830 B2 1,408. 1,445. 1,479. Example: ID S3624 B2; 117, 117, 117, T4 I Interaction Table D Dividends 1 1 /4 top S Straight 36 Width 24 Depth B2 Fixed Height, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T4 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 159 Fixed height tables provide portability in open plan workstations or private offices. Fixed height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Dividends planning, with tops to match Dividends worksurfaces. Panel-mounted worksurfaces adjacent to curvilinear corner tables must be cantilevered, or desk end panel supported. Table base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides provide 1 /2 adjustment for leveling. Specify extender glides (see p. 177) for alignment with Dividends panel-mounted worksurfaces. Rectangular tables accommodate 18 D suspended floorstanding or mobile Dividends pedestals; 30 D tables accommodate 24 D pedestals. Specify extender glides for tables with floorstanding pedestals.

161 C-leg tables, manually adjustable Dividends Horizon tops description w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Straight manually adjustable table / / /2 ID S3024 A2 $1,122. $1,156. $1, / / /2 ID S3030 A2 1,188. 1,223. 1, / / /2 ID S3624 A2 1,153. 1,190. 1, / / /2 ID S3630 A2 1,222. 1,256. 1, / / /2 ID S4224 A2 1,188. 1,223. 1, / / /2 ID S4230 A2 1,254. 1,288. 1, / / /2 ID S4824 A2 1,222. 1,256. 1, / / /2 ID S4830 A2 1,286. 1,322. 1, / / /2 ID S6024 A2 1,286. 1,322. 1, / / /2 ID S6030 A2 1,349. 1,384. 1, / / /2 ID S7224 A2 1,349. 1,384. 1, / / /2 ID S7230 A2 1,416. 1,451. 1,485. Curvilinear corner manually adjustable table / / /2 ID C4224 A2 1,543. 1,578. 1, / / /2 ID C4824 A2 1,638. 1,673. 1, / / /2 ID C4830 A2 1,716. 1,751. 1,787. Example: ID C4830 A2; 117, 117, 117, T2 I Interaction Table D Dividends 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth A2 Adjustable, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T2 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 160 Manually adjustable height tables provide portable, adjustable surfaces in open plan workstations or private offices. Manually adjustable height C leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Dividends planning, with laminate tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces with 2mm edge. Panel-mounted worksurfaces adjacent to curvilinear corner tables must be cantilevered, or desk end panel supported. Table base may be manually adjusted to allow top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height 1 1 /2. (See Accessories, p. 177)

162 C-leg tables, crank adjustable Dividends Horizon tops description w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge lamiante w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Straight crank adjustable table / / /4-35 ID S3024 D(R/L)2 $2,134. $2,168. $2, / / /4-35 ID S3030 D(R/L)2 2,229. 2,264. 2, / / /4-35 ID S3624 D(R/L)2 2,196. 2,230. 2, / / /4-35 ID S3630 D(R/L)2 2,260. 2,295. 2, / / /4-35 ID S4224 D(R/L)2 2,215. 2,250. 2, / / /4-35 ID S4230 D(R/L)2 2,293. 2,330. 2, / / /4-35 ID S4824 D(R/L)2 2,260. 2,295. 2, / / /4-35 ID S4830 D(R/L)2 2,329. 2,365. 2, / / /4-35 ID S6024 D(R/L)2 2,329. 2,365. 2, / / /4-35 ID S6030 D(R/L)2 2,391. 2,427. 2,462. Dividends Horizon System Top Tables Curvilinear corner crank adjustable table / / /4-35 ID C4224 D2 2,586. 2,621. 2, / / /4-35 ID C4824 D2 2,680. 2,715. 2, / / /4-35 ID C4830 D2 2,757. 2,791. 2,826. Example: ID C4830 D2; 117, 117, 117, T2 I Interaction Table D Dividends 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth D Crank adjustable 2 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T2 Trim ring Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Handle location Handle location (rectangular only): R Right hand L Left hand Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 161 Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Crank adjustable C leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Dividends planning, with laminate tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces with 2mm edge. Knoll s patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /2 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Handle may be specified right or left on rectangular tables. Handle is located in center for corner tables. Actual rectangular table widths are 3 /16 less than nominal. Actual corner table widths are 1 /2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2 (see Accessories, p. 177).

163 C-leg tables, Counterforce adjustable Dividends Horizon tops description w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Straight counterforce table / ID S3024 C2 $3,136. $3,170. $3, / ID S3030 C2 3,201. 3,235. 3, / ID S3624 C2 3,168. 3,202. 3, / ID S3630 C2 3,234. 3,268. 3, / ID S4224 C2 3,201. 3,235. 3, / ID S4230 C2 3,265. 3,300. 3, / ID S4824 C2 3,234. 3,268. 3, / ID S4830 C2 3,299. 3,333. 3, / ID S6024 C2 3,299. 3,333. 3, / ID S6030 C2 3,362. 3,396. 3,431. Example: ID S4830 C2; 117, 117, 117, T4 I Interaction Table D Dividends 1 1 /4 top S Top shape 48 Width 30 Depth C2 Base type, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish T4 Trim ring Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 162 Adjustable height Counterforce C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Dividends planning, with laminate tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces with 2mm edge. Fingertip control allows user to adjust from seated to standing-work height (26-41 ) without tools or effort. Counterforce tables may be adjusted by the user to counterbalance loads of 0-90 lbs. Worksurfaces adjacent to curvilinear corner tables must be cantilevered not desk end panel-supported. Table base provides integral, lay-in wire management in legs and horizontal beam. Glides provide 1 /2 adjustment for leveling. Note: 24 D Counterforce tables provide only 16 clear kneespace inside the 12 1 /4 cross-beam, 12 above the floor. ANSI/BIFMA recommends minimum 19 D kneespace, increasing to 23 D at toe height. For corner Counterforce applications, see page 127.

164 T-leg tables Dividends Horizon tops description w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Straight table / / /8 ID S4830 T2 $974. $1,009. $1, / / /8 ID S4836 T2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 ID S6030 T2 1,040. 1,074. 1, / / /8 ID S6036 T2 1,122. 1,156. 1, / / /8 ID S7230 T2 1,122. 1,156. 1, / / /8 ID S7236 T2 1,178. 1,215. 1,249. Rounded end table /8 ID U6330 T2 1,367. 1,401. 1, /8 ID U6636 T2 1,462. 1,498. 1, /8 ID U7530 T2 1,462. 1,498. 1, /8 ID U7836 T2 1,564. 1,597. 1,632. Dividends Horizon System Top Tables Example: ID U7530 T2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table D Dividends top U Rounded end 75 Width 30 Depth T2 Base type, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish T-leg tables provide shared meeting or worksurfaces in conjunction with Dividends or other Interaction tables. Laminate tops match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces in 2mm edge. T-leg base tables are fixed at 28 3 /8 H. Stacking glide extenders may be specified to increase table height in 1 /2 increments. (See Accessories, p. 177) 163

165 C-leg tables, split-top Dividends Horizon tops description type w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Split-top straight table Crank adjustable / / /2-35 ID S36DS D2 $3,501. $3,534. $3,569. Crank adjustable / / /2-35 ID S48DS D2 3,567. 3,602. 3,636. Fixed height / / /8 ID S36DS B2 2,149. 2,185. 2,219. Fixed height / / /8 ID S48DS B2 2,215. 2,250. 2,284. Manually adjustable / / /2 ID S36DS A2 2,461. 2,495. 2,530. Manually adjustable / / /2 ID S48DS A2 2,526. 2,560. 2,595. Split-top curvilinear corner table Fixed height / /8 ID C48SS B2 2,570. 2,603. 2, / /8 ID C48DS B2 2,645. 2,679. 2,714. Manually adjustable / /2 ID C48SS A2 2,879. 2,912. 2, / /2 ID C48DS A2 2,956. 2,991. 3,025. Crank adjustable / /2-35 ID C48SS D2 3,919. 3,953. 3, / /2-35 ID C48DS D2 3,997. 4,033. 4,067. Example: ID S36DS A2; 117, 117, 117, T1 I Interaction Table D Dividends 1 1 /4 top S Straight 36 Width D Depth S Split top A2 Base type, 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Top edge finish 117 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Trim ring finish 164 Split-top tables provide easy, infinite adjustability of full width, keyboard-and-mouse surface. Split-top adjustable height C-leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Dividends planning, with tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces. Fingertip control allows user to adjust front surface for keyboard and mouse from 5 1 /2 above to 6 1 /2 below rear surface. Front surface may also be adjusted +/-15. Adjustable table base may be manually adjusted to allow rear top height at any 1 /2 increment from 26 to 29 1 /2. Fixed height table base fixes rear worksurface at 28 3 /8 H. Knoll s patented crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 300 lbs. of equipment. Five turns of the low-profile folding crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 23 1 /2 to 35 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. For split top tables, handle is located in front center of rear worksurface. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters raise heights 1 1 /2. For Counterforce split-top applications, see page 127.

166 C-leg tables, top crank adjustable Dividends Horizon tops description w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge lamiante w/ metal edge Straight crank adjustable table / /4 ID S3024 K2 $1,741. $1,768. $1, / /4 ID S3030 K2 1,818. 1,846. 1, / /4 ID S3624 K2 1,791. 1,819. 1, / /4 ID S3630 K2 1,844. 1,872. 1, / /4 ID S4224 K2 1,805. 1,834. 1, / /4 ID S4230 K2 1,871. 1,900. 1, / /4 ID S4824 K2 1,844. 1,872. 1, / /4 ID S4830 K2 1,897. 1,928. 1, / /4 ID S6024 K2 1,897. 1,928. 1, / /4 ID S6030 K2 1,950. 1,977. 2,007. Dividends Horizon System Top Tables Curvilinear corner crank adjustable table / /4 ID C4224 K2 2,109. 2,138. 2, / /4 ID C4824 K2 2,187. 2,215. 2, / /4 ID C4830 K2 2,247. 2,277. 2,305. Straight split top crank adjustable table / /4 ID S42DS K2 2,854. 2,883. 2, / /4 ID S48DS K2 2,908. 2,937. 2,966. Curv. corner split-top crank adjustable table / /4 ID C48SS K2 3,197. 3,225. 3, / /4 ID C48DS K2 3,259. 3,287. 3,314. Specification Information Example: ID C4830 K2; 117, 117, 117 I Interaction Table D Dividends 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth K Top crank adjustable 2 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish Crank adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Crank adjustable C leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Dividends planning, with laminate tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces with 2mm edge. The hand crank adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Five turns of the crank handle raise or lower the top one inch, through a 27 1 /4 to 43 1 /4 height range. The handle grip is soft textured rubber over steel. Rectangular table widths are 2 less than nominal while depths are 1 less than nominal for safety. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2. 165

167 C-leg tables, electric adjustable Dividends Horizon tops description w d h pattern no. laminate w/ PVC edge laminate w/ woodgrain edge laminate w/ metal edge Straight electric adjustable table / /4 ID S3024 E2 $2,556. $2,584. $2, / /4 ID S3030 E2 2,608. 2,637. 2, / /4 ID S3624 E2 2,581. 2,609. 2, / /4 ID S3630 E2 2,636. 2,664. 2, / /4 ID S4224 E2 2,608. 2,637. 2, / /4 ID S4230 E2 2,662. 2,689. 2, / /4 ID S4824 E2 2,636. 2,664. 2, / /4 ID S4830 E2 2,688. 2,719. 2, / /4 ID S6024 E2 2,688. 2,719. 2, / /4 ID S6030 E2 2,741. 2,770. 2,796. Curvilinear corner electric adjustable table / /4 ID C3624 E2 2,777. 2,829. 2, / /4 ID C4224 E2 2,840. 2,909. 2, / /4 ID C4824 E2 2,916. 2,999. 3, / /4 ID C4830 E2 2,966. 3,058. 3,149. Curv. corner split-top electric adjustable table / /4 ID C48SS E2 3,924. 4,007. 4, / /4 ID C48DS E2 3,973. 4,065. 4,158. Example: ID C4830 E2; 117, 117, 117 I Interaction Table D Dividends 1 1 /4 top C Curvilinear 48 Width 30 Depth E Electric adjustable 2 2mm top edge 117 Top finish 117 Edge finish 117 Base finish Specification Information Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type Specify color fields: Top finish Top edge finish Base finish 166 Electric adjustable tables provide simple, quick height adjustment for today s heavy equipment loads, and can be used in open plan workstations or private offices. Electric adjustable C leg tables may be used interactively in panel-based Dividends planning, with laminate tops to match 1 1 /4 worksurfaces with 2mm edge. The electric adjustment mechanism easily lifts up to 200 pounds. Mechanism adjusts up or down at a rate of one inch per second through a27 1 /4 to 43 1 /4 height range. Up/down control may be located nearly anywhere on the underside of the table for either left handed or right handed operation. Rectangular table widths are 2 less than actual while depths are 1 less than actual for safety. Corner table widths are 2 less than nominal. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Locking casters may be ordered to replace glides. Casters raise top height range 1 1 /2.

168 Four-star base, fixed and adjustable height Cascade edge tops round description type w h pattern no. Solid Woodgrain Round table Fixed height ICER3000X $1,007. $1, ICER3600X 1,034. 1, ICER4200X 1,097. 1, ICER4800X 1,325. 1,382. Fixed height with casters ICER3000W 1,038. 1, ICER3600W 1,064. 1, ICER4200W 1,126. 1,182. Cascade Edge Top Tables Specification Information Example: ICE R4200 X; 118, 113, T1 I Interaction Table CE Cascade edge top R Round w X Base type 118 Top finish 113 Base finish T1 Trim ring finish Pattern number logic: 1. Interaction table 2. System top 3. Top shape 4-7. Top size 8. Base type 9. Top type Available Top colors: Solid: 114 Folkstone Grey 117 Soft Grey 118 Bright White 119 Pumice Specify color fields: Top finish Base finish Trim ring finish Bold line on image represents Cascade Edge detail. Four-star base tables may be used interactively in panel-based or freestanding planning any Knoll system. Fixed height four-star base tables are 29 H. Glides permit 1 /2 leveling. Casters for adjustable tables must be specified separately (see Accessories, p. 177). Woodgrain: 124 Medium Cherry 125 Natural Maple 126 Natural Cherry 127 Walnut 167